Projector PT-MZ770 Series Operating Instructions English

Operating Instructions
Functional Manual
LCD Projector   Commercial Use
Model No. PT-MZ770

PT-MW730
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
■■ This manual is common to all the models regardless of suffixes of the Model No.
zzfor India
D: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied
zzfor Asia (except for Taiwan, Korea) / Oceania
A: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied LA: White model, the lens sold separately
zzfor Taiwan
A: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied
zzfor Korea
Without L: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied
With L: White model, the lens sold separately (PT-MZ770L only)
zzfor other countries or regions
Without L / LB: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied With L: White model, the lens sold separately
With LB: Black model, the lens sold separately (PT-MZ770LB only)
■■ Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual
for future use.
■■ Before using this product, be sure to read “Read this first!” (x pages 5 to 15).
ENGLISH
DPQP1224ZB/X1
Contents
Contents
Read this first!
5 Chapter 3 Basic Operations
Switching on/off the projector 58
Chapter 1 Preparation Connecting the power cord 58
Power indicator 59
Precautions for use 20
Switching on the projector 60
Intended use of the product 20
When the initial setting screen is displayed 61
Lens protection material 20
Making adjustments and selections 65
Cautions when transporting 20
Switching off the projector 66
Cautions when installing 20
Security 23 Projecting 67
Notes regarding the wireless LAN 23 Selecting the input signal 67
Light ID 24 Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift 68
DIGITAL LINK 25 Moving the lens position to the home position 69
Application software supported by the projector Adjustment range by the lens position shift
25 (optical shift) 69
Storing 26 Using the USB memory 70
Disposal 26 Notes on use 70
Cautions on use 26 USB memory that can be used with the
projector 70
Accessories 27
Attaching the USB memory 70
Optional accessories 28
Removing the USB memory 71
About your projector 29
Operating with the remote control 72
Remote control 29
Using the shutter function 72
Projector body 31
Using the mute function 72
Preparing the remote control 34
Adjusting the volume 73
Inserting and removing the batteries 34
Using the freeze function 73
When using the multiple projectors 34
Using the on-screen display function 73
Connecting the remote control to the projector
with a cable 34 Using the automatic setup function 74
Using the screen adjustment function 74
Chapter 2 Getting Started Using the digital zoom function 75
Switching the image aspect ratio 76
Setting up 36 Using the presentation timer function 76
Installation mode 36 Using the function button 76
Parts for installation (optional) 37 Displaying internal test pattern 76
Projected image and throw distance 38 Using the status function 77
Adjusting adjustable feet 48 Using the ECO management function 77
Removing/attaching the projection lens 49 Setting ID number of the remote control 77
Removing the projection lens 49
Attaching the projection lens 50 Chapter 4 Settings
Attaching the Wireless Module 51
Menu navigation 80
Attaching the Wireless Module 51
Navigating through the menu 80
Connecting 52
Main menu 81
Before connecting 52
Sub-menu 82
Connecting example: AV equipment 53
Connecting example: Computers 54
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK 55
2 - ENGLISH
Contents
[PICTURE] menu 85 [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu 113

[PICTURE MODE] 85 [PROJECTOR ID] 113
[CONTRAST] 85 [PROJECTION METHOD] 113
[BRIGHTNESS] 85 [ECO MANAGEMENT] 114
[COLOR] 86 [LightID] 116
[TINT] 86 [INITIAL STARTUP] 117
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] 86 [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] 117
[GAMMA] 87 [DATE AND TIME] 118
[DAYLIGHT VIEW] 88 [SCHEDULE] 119
[SHARPNESS] 88 [RS-232C] 120
[NOISE REDUCTION] 88 [REMOTE1 MODE] 122
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] 89 [FUNCTION BUTTON] 122
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] 89 [LENS CALIBRATION] 122
[POSITION] menu 91 [AUDIO SETTING] 123
[SHIFT] 91 [FILTER COUNTER] 125
[ASPECT] 91 [DC OUT] 126
[ZOOM] 92 [STATUS] 126
[CLOCK PHASE] 93 [DATA CLONING] 127
[REALTIME KEYSTONE] 93 [SAVE ALL USER DATA] 130
[SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] 94 [LOAD ALL USER DATA] 130
[ADVANCED MENU] menu 97 [INITIALIZE] 131
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] 97 [SERVICE PASSWORD] 131
[BLANKING] 97 [TEST PATTERN] menu 132
[INPUT RESOLUTION] 98 [TEST PATTERN] 132
[CLAMP POSITION] 98 [SIGNAL LIST] menu 133
[RASTER POSITION] 98 Registering new signals 133
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu 99 Renaming the registered signal 133
Changing the display language 99 Deleting the registered signal 133
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu 100 Protecting the registered signal
134
[COLOR ADJUSTMENT] 100 Expanding signal lock-in range 134
[COLOR CORRECTION] 100 Sub memory 135
[SCREEN SETTING] 101 [SECURITY] menu 136
[AUTO SIGNAL] 101 [SECURITY PASSWORD] 136
[AUTO SETUP] 101 [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 136
[RGB IN] 102 [DISPLAY SETTING] 136
[HDMI IN] 103 [TEXT CHANGE] 137
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 105 [MENU LOCK] 137
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 106 [MENU LOCK PASSWORD] 137
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] (only when [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 138
NTSC signal is input) 108 [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
[SIGNAL SEARCH] 109 139
[BACK COLOR] 109
[STARTUP LOGO] 110
[SHUTTER SETTING] 110
[P-TIMER] 111
[FREEZE] 112
[DIGITAL ZOOM] 112
ENGLISH - 3
Contents
[NETWORK/USB] menu 140 Maintenance/replacement 200

[DIGITAL LINK MODE] 140 Before performing maintenance/replacement 200
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS] 140 Maintenance 200
[DIGITAL LINK MENU] 141 Replacing the unit 202
[WIRED LAN] 141 Troubleshooting 204
[WIRELESS LAN] 142 FAQ 206
[PROJECTOR NAME] 146 Wireless LAN connection 206
[NETWORK CONTROL] 146 Mirroring connection 206
[MEMORY VIEWER] 146 [SELF TEST] display 208
[Panasonic APPLICATION] 148
[MIRRORING] 150 Chapter 7 Appendix
[NETWORK STATUS] 151
Technical information 211
Chapter 5 Operations PJLink protocol 211
Control commands via LAN 212
Network connection 154 <SERIAL IN> terminal 215
Connecting via wired LAN 155 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal 219
Connecting with the wireless LAN 157 Operating [MENU LOCK PASSWORD] 219
Web control function 159 List of compatible signals 220
Computer that can be used for setting 159 Specifications 223
Accessing from the web browser 159 Dimensions 228
Projecting with Panasonic APPLICATION input Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount
179 Bracket 229
Application that can be used 179 Index 231
Connecting the device 179
Ending the connection with the device 179
Description of the standby screen 180
Using the moderator mode in the Panasonic
APPLICATION input 181
Projecting with MIRRORING input 182
Connecting the device 182
Ending the connection with the device 183
Using the moderator mode in the MIRRORING
input 183
Operating with the web browser 184
Description of the [MODERATOR MODE] page
185
Projecting with MEMORY VIEWER input 186
Images that can be played back with the
Memory Viewer function 186
Displaying the Memory Viewer screen 187
Operating the Memory Viewer screen 187
Playing back still images 189
Playing back movies 190
Description of the Memory Viewer screen 193
Playing back using the contents list 194
Using the pairing function 195
Pairing the USB memory 195
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Light source/temperature/filter indicators 198
When an indicator lights up 198
4 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
Read this first!

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
WARNING: To prevent damage which may result in fire or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain
or moisture.
This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid
incommoding reflexions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct
field of view.
The equipment is not intended for used at a video workstation in compliance BildscharbV.
The sound pressure level at the operator position is equal or less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 7779.
WARNING:
1. Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.
2. To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong earthing-
type mains plug. This plug will only fit an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the
earthing plug.
WARNING:
This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR32.
In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
(for Taiwan)
WARNING:
This equipment complies with the Class A standard of CISPR32.
This is Class A information technology equipment that may cause radio frequency interference when used in a
residential environment, in which the user will be required to take certain appropriate countermeasures.
CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using
the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral
devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
This is a device to project images onto a screen, etc., and is not intended for use as indoor lighting in a
domestic environment.
Directive 2009/125/EC
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN
or
Indicated on the projector
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.
ENGLISH - 5
Read this first!
WARNING: Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
As with any bright source, do not stare into the direct beam, RG2 IEC 62471-5:2015.
Notice on laser
(for USA and Canada)
This projector is the Class 3R laser product that complies with IEC 60825-1:2007.
DANGER-CLASS 4 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EYE OR

SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED RADIATION
DANGER-RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 4 - EN CAS D'OUVERTURE
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU RAYONNEMENT DIRECT OU
DIFFUS DES YEUX OU DE LA PEAU
DPQT1359ZA (Inside of product)
(for India)
This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
6 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
(for other countries or regions)

This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

Power Supply: This Projector is designed to operate on 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz AC, house current only.
CAUTION: The AC power cord which is supplied with the projector as an accessory can only be used for
power supplies up to 125 V. If you need to use higher voltages than this, you will need to obtain a
separate 250 V power cord. If you use the accessory cord in such situations, fire may result.
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

This equipment is equipped with a three-pin grounding-type power plug. Do not
remove the grounding pin on the power plug. This plug will only fit a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the
outlet, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug.
Do not remove
WARNING (USA and Canada)

ff Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data
Processing Equipment, ANSI/NFPA 75.
ff For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the
building installation wiring.
ff For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
For USA-California Only

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling
may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
ENGLISH - 7
Read this first!
FCC NOTICE (USA)

Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity
Model Number: PT-MZ770 / PT-MZ770L / PT-MZ770LB / PT-MW730 / PT-MW730L
Trade Name: Panasonic
Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America
Address: Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
General Contact: http://www.panasonic.com/support
Projector Contact: https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Caution:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using the provided
power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Also, any
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to operate this device.
8 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
IMPORTANT: THE MOLDED PLUG

FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a molded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse
is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating
of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover
can be purchased from an Authorized Service Center.
If the fitted molded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home, then the fuse should be
removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the
cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:
Green - and - Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colors of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the colored markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is colored GREEN - AND - YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug
which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN - AND -
YELLOW.
The wire which is colored BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or colored BLACK.
The wire which is colored BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter L or colored RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
Importer’s name and address within the European Union

Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
ENGLISH - 9
Read this first!
Hazard distance (IEC 62471-5:2015)

The distance at which the level of exposure has reached the level of the applicable Exposure Limit Value is known
as the hazard distance (HD) or safety distance.
Do not look into the projected light from inside the hazard distance (within RG3 range). The eyes may be damaged
by the direct irradiation. It is considered to be safe to look into the projected light from outside the hazard distance
(within RG2 range).
HD HD
D3
D1 RG2 RG3
RG2 RG3
D2 D4
(Unit: m)
Lens HD *1
D1 *2
D2 *2
D3 *2
D4*2
ET-ELW21 0.97 0.97 1.13 1.13

ET-ELW22 0.89 0.89 1.03 1.03
ET-ELW20 0.62 0.62 0.72 0.72
Standard Zoom Lens/ < 1.0
0.47 0.47 0.55 0.55
ET-ELS20
ET-ELT22 0.29 0.29 0.34 0.34
ET-ELT23 0.19 0.19 0.23 0.23
*1 HD: Hazard Distance
*2 D1, D2, D3, and D4 change in accordance with projection lens shift amount. Each value in this table represents the maximum range.
Note
ff The values in the table comply with IEC 62471-5:2015.
10 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
WARNING:
rr POWER
The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately.
Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in fire or electric shock, or will cause visual
impairment.
ff If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.
ff If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.
ff If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.
Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.
During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.
Electric shocks can result.
Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.
If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or fire will result.
ff Do not damage the power cord, make any modifications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it
excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.
Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.
Do not use anything other than the provided power cord.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks or fire. Please note that if you do not use the provided power
cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet, this may result in electric shocks.
Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.
If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.
ff Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.
Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.
Do not overload the wall outlet.
If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and fire will result.
Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.
Failure to observe this will cause a fire.
ff If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.
ff If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.
rr ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, fire or damage to the projector.
Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into
contact with oily smoke or steam.
Using the projector under such conditions will result in fire, electric shocks or deterioration of components. Oil
may also distort the plastic and the projector could fall such as when mounted on the ceiling.
Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector
or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.
Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage
could result.
Do not install the projector in a location where people pass through.
People may bump into the projector or trip on the power cord, which may result in fire, electric shock, or injury.
Do not cover the air intake/exhaust ports.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the projector.
ff Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.
ff Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the air intake port.
ff Provide at least 1 m (39-3/8") of space between any walls or objects and the exhaust port, and at least
50 cm (19-11/16") of space between any walls or objects and the intake port.
ENGLISH - 11
Read this first!
WARNING:
Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
Do not enter the projection luminous flux using an optical device (such as magnifier or mirror).
Doing so can cause burns or loss of sight.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not look at or place your hands directly into this light.
ff Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and
disconnect the power plug when you are away from the projector.
Do not project an image with the lens cover attached.
Doing so can cause fire.
Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.
High voltages can cause fire or electric shocks.
ff For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.
Do not allow metal objects, flammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow
the projector to get wet.
Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in fire, electric shock, or malfunction of the
projector.
ff Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.
ff If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.
ff Particular attention must be paid to children.
Use the ceiling mount bracket specified by Panasonic.
Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one will result in falling accidents.
ff Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.
Installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling should only be carried out by a qualified
technician.
If installation is not carried out and secured correctly, it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.
rr ACCESSORIES
Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.
Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire.
ff Do not use unspecified batteries.
ff Do not charge dry cell batteries.
ff Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.
ff Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire.
ff Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as
necklaces or hairpins.
ff Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.
ff Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.
ff Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.
ff Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.
ff Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.
If the battery fluid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.
ff Battery fluid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inflammation or injury.
Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
ff Battery fluid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.
In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
Do not allow children to reach the batteries.
Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm.
ff If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.
ff Leaving them in the unit may result in fluid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.
12 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
CAUTION:
rr POWER
When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.
If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious electric shocks
will result.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet.
Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Before replacing the projection lens, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from
the wall outlet.
ff Unexpected projection of light may cause injury to eyes.
ff Replacing the projection lens without removing the power plug may result in electric shock.
Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning and replacing the unit.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
rr ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or
injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.
Do not put your weight on this projector.
You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.
ff Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.
Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.
Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in fire.
ff Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters.
Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.
Failure to observe this could cause injury.
Do not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur.
Doing so may result in falling due to corrosion. Also, it may result in malfunctions.
Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Do not block the projection by placing an object in front of the projection lens.
Doing so can cause fire, damage to an object, or malfunction of the projector.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause fire or electric shocks to
occur.
Never plug headphones and earphones into <VARIABLE AUDIO OUT> terminal.
Excessive sound pressure from headphones and earphones can cause hearing loss.
When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with
metal parts inside the ceiling.
Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.
ENGLISH - 13
Read this first!
CAUTION:
rr ACCESSORIES
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote
control.
Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch fire or explode, which may result in fire or
contamination of surrounding area.
rr MAINTENANCE
Do not attach the air filter unit while it is wet.
Doing so may result in electric shock or malfunctions.
ff After you clean the air filter units, dry them thoroughly before reattaching them.
Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector every 20 000 hours of usage as an estimated
duration.
Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in fire.
ff For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.
To remove the battery
Remote Control Battery

1. Press the guide and lift the cover. 2. Remove the batteries.
(ii)
(i)
14 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
Brazil Only
Brasil Apenas
rr Manuseio de baterias usadas
BRASIL
Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias deverão
ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial
ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada.
Cobrir os terminais positivo (+) e negativo (-) com uma fita isolante adesiva, antes de depositar numa caixa
destinada para o recolhimento. O contato entre partes metálicas pode causar vazamentos, gerar calor, romper
a blindagem e produzir fogo. (Fig. 1)
Fig. 1 Fita Isolante

Como isolar os terminais
Fita Isolante
Não desmonte, não remova o invólucro, nem amasse a bateria. O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a
garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo
devido ao curto circuito dos terminais. Não incinere nem aqueça as baterias, elas não podem ficar expostas a
temperaturas superiores a 100 °C (212 °F). O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre
do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos
terminais provocado internamente.
Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias. Caso isto ocorra, lave bem a parte afetada com bastante
água. Caso haja irritação, consulte um médico.
rr Remoção das baterias

1. Pressione a guia e levante a tampa. 2. Remova as baterias.
(ii)
(i)
ENGLISH - 15

r
rTrademarks
ffSOLID SHINE is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
ffPanasonic owns patents relating to Light ID technology in Japan and other countries.
ff“LinkRay” and the icon are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.
ffWi-Fi®, Wi-Fi DirectTM and MiracastTM are registered trademarks or trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
ffWindows, Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
ffMac, macOS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
ffPJLinkTM is a registered trademark or pending trademark in Japan, the United States, and other countries and
regions.
ffThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
ffCrestron Connected, the Crestron Connected logo, Crestron Fusion, Crestron RoomView, and RoomView are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
ffHDBaseTTM is a trademark of HDBaseT Alliance.
ffIOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
ffAndroid is a trademark of Google Inc.
ffQR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.
ffAdobe, Adobe Flash Player, and Adobe Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
in the United States and/or other countries.
ffSome of the fonts used in the on-screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts, which are manufactured and sold by
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
ffThis product is licensed under AVC Patent Portfolio License, VC-1 Patent Portfolio License, and MPEG-4 Visual
Patent Portfolio License, and following actions except for the personal or non-profit use are not licensed.
ggRecording the image information in compliance with the AVC standard, the VC-1 standard, and the MPEG-4
Visual standard (AVC/VC-1/MPEG-4 video hereafter)
ggPlaying back the AVC/VC-1/MPEG-4 video recorded by consumer practicing in a private activity, or AVC/VC-1/
MPEG-4 video acquired from the licensed provider
For details, refer to the website of MPEG LA, LLC (http://www.mpegla.com).
ffAll other names, company names, and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
Please note that the ® and TM symbols are not specified in this manual.
r
rSoftware information regarding this product
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/or LGPL V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Please refer to the detailed terms and conditions thereof shown in the attached CD-ROM.
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic will give to any third party who contacts us at
the contact information provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically performing source code
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0, LGPL
V2.1 or the other licenses with the obligation to do so, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof.
Contact Information: [email protected]
r
rIllustrations in this manual
ffIllustrations of the projector, menu screen (OSD), and other parts may vary from the actual product.
ffIllustrations displayed on the computer screen may differ depending on the computer type and its operating
system.
ffIllustrations of the projector with the power cord attached are only examples. The shape of the supplied power
cords varies depending on the country where you purchased the product.
16 - ENGLISH

r
rReference pages
ffReference pages in this manual are indicated as (x page 00).
r
rTerm
ffIn this manual, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessory is referred to as “Remote control”.
ENGLISH - 17

Features of the Projector Quick Steps

For details, refer to the corresponding pages.
High picture quality 1. Set up the projector.

(x page 36)
▶▶With a unique optical system which uses
a new-generation laser light source, and
the laser light source drive system, high 2. Attach the projection lens.
luminance of 8 000 lm and high contrast (x page 50)
of 3 000 000:1*1 are achieved even with its
compact size. Also, 4K video signal input is
supported.
3. Connect with external devices.
*1 When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC], and
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [1] or [2] (x page 52)
Easy and highly flexible setup 4. Connect the power cord.

(x page 58)
▶▶In addition to the lens replacement method
and equipping of the lens shift, usage
in a wide range of application is made
possible by supporting a wide range of 5. Switch on the projector.
interfaces such as DIGITAL LINK, and by (x page 60)
supporting the 360° installation utilizing the
characteristics of solid-sate light source.
6. Make initial settings.
(x page 61)
Long life and high reliability
ffTake this step when you switch on the
power for the first time after purchasing the
▶▶The maintenance cost for long-term projector.
operation is reduced by the unique light
source cooling control technology and
improvement of the dust resistance. 7. Select the input signal.
(x page 67)
8. Adjust the image.

(x page 68)
18 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1 Preparation
This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector.
ENGLISH - 19
Chapter 1 Preparation — Precautions for use
Precautions for use

Intended use of the product
The product is intended to project still/moving image signals from video equipment and computers onto a screen.
Lens protection material

If you purchased the projector with the standard zoom lens, remove the lens protection material before use, and
store it for the future use. Move the lens position to the home position and attach the lens protection material
when transporting.
If you purchased the projector with the lens sold separately, remove the lens hole cover before use, and store it
for the future use. Move the lens position to the home position, remove the projection lens, and attach the lens
hole cover when transporting.
For the steps to move the lens position to the home position, refer to “Moving the lens position to the home
position” (x page 69).
Lens hole cover

Lens protection material
Cautions when transporting

ffWhen transporting the projector, hold it securely by its bottom and avoid excessive vibration and impacts. They
may damage the internal components and result in malfunctions.
ffDo not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.
Cautions when installing
r not set up the projector outdoors.

rDo
The projector is designed for indoor use only.
r not set up the projector in the following locations.

rDo
ffPlaces where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal
components or malfunction.
ffLocation close to sea or where corrosive gas may occur: The projector may fall due to corrosion. Also, failure to
do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunction.
ffNear the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may fluctuate in rare
cases due to the heated air from the air exhaust port or the hot or cooled air from the air conditioner. Make sure
that the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward
the front of the projector.
ffPlaces with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of
the light source, or result in deformation of the projector due to heat, which may cause malfunctions.
Follow the operating environment temperature of the projector.
ffNear high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.
20 - ENGLISH
r
rAsk a qualified technician or your dealer for the installation work such as installing to
a ceiling, etc.
To ensure projector performance and safety, ask a qualified technician or your dealer when installing to a ceiling
or in a high place.
r
rAsk a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK
connection.
Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate
installation.
r
rThe projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast
station or the radio.
If there is any facility or equipment which outputs strong radio waves near the installation location, install the
projector at a location sufficiently far from the source of the radio waves. Or, wrap the LAN cable connected to the
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal using a piece of metal foil or a metal pipe which is grounded at both ends.
r
rFocus adjustment
The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source, making the focus unstable in
the period just after switching on the power. It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least
30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
r not install the projector at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
rDo
r not use the projector in a location that the ambient temperature exceeds 45 °C
rDo
(113 °F).
Using the projector in a location that the altitude is too high or the ambient temperature is too high may reduce the
life of the components or result in malfunctions.
r
rProjection in all 360° direction is possible.
360°
360° 360°
360° vertically 360° horizontally 360° tilted

(combination of vertical and horizontal)
ENGLISH - 21
r
rCautions when setting up the projector
ffUse the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other
purposes may damage the projector.
ffWhen installing the projector with a method other than the floor installation using the adjustable feet or the
ceiling installation using the ceiling mount bracket, use the four screw holes for ceiling mount (as shown in the
figure) to fix the projector.
In such case, make sure that there is no clearance between the screw holes for ceiling mount on the projector
bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers (metallic) between them.
ffUse a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten the fixing screws to their specified tightening torques.
Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
(Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the projector: 12 mm (15/32"), screw tightening torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
Adjustable feet
Screw holes for ceiling mount

(M6)
Positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and

adjustable feet
ffDo not stack projectors on top of each other.

ffDo not use the projector supporting it by the top.
ffDo not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
ffPrevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the ventilation ports (intake and
exhaust) of the projector.
500 mm (19-11/16") or longer 500 mm (19-11/16") or longer
1 000 mm (39-3/8") or longer
100 mm (3-15/16") or longer
ffDo not install the projector in a confined space.

When installing the projector in a confined space, provide air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat
may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
22 - ENGLISH
ffPanasonic takes no responsibility for any damage to the product caused by an inappropriate choice of location
for installing the projector, even if the warranty period of the product has not expired.
Security
When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.
ffPersonal information being leaked via this product
ffUnauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
ffInterfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
Take sufficient security measures.
ffMake your password difficult to guess as much as possible.
ffChange your password periodically. The password can be set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY
PASSWORD CHANGE] or the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [Panasonic APPLICATION] → [PASSWORD
CHANGE].
ffPanasonic Corporation or its affiliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge your
password in case you receive such inquiries.
ffThe connecting network must be secured by a firewall, etc.
ffSet a password for the web control and restrict the users who can log in. A password for the web control can be
set in the [Change password] page of the web control screen.
r
rSecurity when using the wireless LAN product
The advantage of a wireless LAN is that information can be exchanged between a computer or other such
equipment and a wireless access point using radio waves, instead of using a LAN cable, as long as you are within
range for radio transmissions.
On the other hand, because the radio wave can travel through an obstacle (such as a wall) and is accessible from
anywhere within a given range, following problems may occur if security setting is insufficient.
ffTransmitted data may be intercepted
A malicious third part may intentionally intercept radio waves and monitor the following transmitted data.
ggPersonal information such as your ID, password, credit card number
ggContent of an Email
ffIllegally accessed
A malicious third party may access your personal or corporate network without authorization and engage in the
following types of behavior.
ggRetrieve personal and/or secret information (information leak)
ggSpread false information by impersonating a particular person (spoofing)
ggOverwrite intercepted communications and issue false data (tampering)
ggSpread harmful software such as a computer virus and crash your data and/or system (system crash)
Since most wireless LAN adapters or access points are equipped with security features to take care of these
problems, you can reduce the possibility of these problems occurring when using this product by making the
appropriate security settings for the wireless LAN device.
Some wireless LAN devices may not be set for security immediately after purchase. To decrease the possibility
of occurrence of security problems, be sure to make all security related settings according to the operation
instructions supplied with each wireless LAN device before using a wireless LAN device.
Depending on the specifications of the wireless LAN, a malicious third party may be able to break security settings
by special means.
Panasonic asks customers to thoroughly understand the risk of using this product without making security
settings, and recommends that the customers make security settings at their own discretion and responsibility.
Notes regarding the wireless LAN

Radio wave in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band is used when the wireless LAN connection function of the projector is
used. The license of wireless station is not required, but understand the following when using.
To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model
No.: ET‑WM300).
For details on how to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300), refer to “Attaching the
Wireless Module” (x page 51).
ENGLISH - 23
r not use close to other wireless devices.

rDo
Following devices may be using radio wave in the same bandwidth as the projector. Using the projector close to
these devices may cause the communication to be disabled or the communication speed to slow down due to
interference of radio wave.
ffMicrowave oven, etc.
ffIndustrial, scientific, or medical devices, etc.
ffIn-plant wireless station for identifying moving vehicles used in the manufacturing lines at a plant
ffSpecified low power wireless station
r not use cell phone, television, or radio as much as possible close to the projector.
rDo
Cell phone, television, or radio is using radio wave with different bandwidth from the projector, so there is no effect
on the wireless LAN communication or the send/receive on these devices. However, noise may occur in the audio
or video due to the radio wave from the projector.
r
rRadio wave for wireless LAN communication does not go through the reinforcing
bars, metal, or concrete.
The projector can communicate through wall or floor made of wood or glass (excluding the glass with metal mesh
embedded), but it cannot communicate through wall or floor made of reinforcing bars, metal, or concrete.
r not use the projector as much as possible in a location where static electricity is
rDo
generated.
The communication via wireless LAN or wired LAN may be prone to disruption when the projector is used in a
location where static electricity or noise is generated.
There is a rare case that the LAN connection may not be established due to static electricity or noise, so in such
case, turn off the projector, remove the source of problematic static electricity or noise, and turn the projector back
on.
r
rThis device is restricted to indoor use when operated in the 2.412 to 2.472 GHz band,
in the 5.18 to 5.825 GHz frequency range (Channels 36 to 165).
r
rUsing the projector outside the country
Note that depending on countries or regions there are restrictions on the channels and frequencies at which you
can use the wireless LAN.
Light ID
Light ID is one of the visible light communication technologies to transfer information with fast speed and stability
using flashing of light. This projector is equipped with a function to transmit the Light ID signal, and following
usage is possible by utilizing the LinkRay Light ID solution service provided by Panasonic.
ffBy receiving the Light ID signal transmitted by the projector using the camera on a device (smartphone/tablet)
and a dedicated application software, the contents linked to that Light ID signal are acquired and displayed on
the screen of the device.
For details, visit the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/LinkRay/).
Note
ff A separate contract is necessary to use the LinkRay Light ID solution service.
ff The smartphone application software “LinkRay - Light ID Solution” is required.
Search and download “LinkRay” from App Store or Google Play. For the latest information of devices that the operation has
been verified, visit the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/LinkRay/).
r
rNotes regarding Light ID function
ffThe projected image may flicker when the Light ID signal is transmitted, but this is caused luminance change
during the transmission of the Light ID, and it is not a malfunction.
ffA striped pattern may generate on the recorded image when the projected image is recorded by a camera, etc.
ffThe light output will decrease while the Light ID function is used.
ffThe Light ID signal may become difficult to receive by a device (smartphone/tablet) in following cases.
ggWhen strong light such as outside light is illuminating on the projected screen
ggWhen a Light ID transmitting device other than this projector is installed nearby
ggWhen receiving a signal in a location far from the screen
24 - ENGLISH
ggWhen receiving a signal in a location that is angled against the screen

ggWhen the light reflection loss is large due to the screen characteristics
ggWhen the size of the projected image is small
ggWhen the displayed projected image is dark
ffWhen using a laser format bar code reader, take care not to illuminate the bar code reading surface with the
projection light or its reflected light. Doing so may cause bar code reader not to read or misread.
ffThe Light ID function of the projector is not guaranteed to operate on all devices.
DIGITAL LINK
“DIGITAL LINK” is a technology to transmit the video, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signals using a twisted
pair cable by adding unique functions by Panasonic to the HDBaseTTM communication standard formulated by
HDBaseT Alliance.
This projector supports the optional Panasonic DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G,
ET‑YFB200G) and peripheral devices by other manufacturers (twisted-pair-transmitters such as the “XTP
transmitter” of Extron Electronics) based on the same HDBaseTTM standard. For the devices of other
manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the Panasonic website (https://
panasonic.net/cns/projector/). Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the
items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance
problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
Application software supported by the projector

The projector supports following application software. For details or downloading each application software, visit
the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ffLogo Transfer Software
This application software transfers the original image, such as company logo, which is projected at the start, to
the projector.
ffSmart Projector Control
This application software sets and adjusts the projector connected via LAN using a smartphone or a tablet.
ffMulti Monitoring & Control Software
This application software monitors and controls the multiple display devices (projector and flat panel display)
connected to an intranet.
ffEarly Warning Software
This plug-in software monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals within an intranet, and
notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality. “Early Warning
Software” is preinstalled in the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”. To use the early warning function of
this plug-in software, install “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” in the PC to be used. By enabling the early
warning function, it will notify of the approximate time to replace the consumables for the display devices,
to clean each part of the display devices, and to replace the components of the display devices, allowing to
execute maintenance in advance.
The early warning function can be used by registering maximum of 2048 display devices free of charge for
90 days after installing the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” into a PC. To continuously use after the 90
days, it is necessary to purchase the license of “Early Warning Software” (ET‑SWA100 Series) and perform
the activation. Also, depending on the type of license, the number of display devices that can be registered for
monitoring varies. For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
ffWireless Manager ME6.4
This application software transmits the computer screen to the projector via wireless LAN or wired LAN.
Simultaneous projection from one computer to multiple projectors, or simultaneous projection from multiple
computers to one projector is possible.
ffPlug and Share
This application software makes it possible to project the computer screen with the projector easily by omitting
the selection of the device when connecting the computer via network by pairing a projector and a computer
using the USB memory.
ffWireless Projector
This application software for iOS/Android is used to project files such as PDF or image by transmitting to the
projector via wireless LAN.
ENGLISH - 25
Storing
To store the projector, store in a dry room.
Disposal
To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal. Also, dispose of the
product without disassembling.
Cautions on use
r get a good picture quality

rTo
In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds
over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from
shining onto the screen.
r not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
rDo
If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from fingerprints or anything else, this will be magnified and
projected onto the screen.
r
rLCD panel
The LCD panel is manufactured by a technology with extremely high precision, but there may be missing pixels or
pixels that is constantly illuminated in a rare case. Note that these phenomenon are not malfunction.
Also, a residual image may remain in the image of the LCD panel when a still image is projected for long time, and
in such case, project a full white image for 1 hour or longer. Note that the residual image may not be completely
erased.
r
rOptical parts
The replacement cycle for the optical parts such as the LCD panel or polarization plate may become shorter even
if it is used for less than one year when the ambient temperature is high or in an environment with large amount of
dust or cigarette smoke. For details, consult your dealer.
r
rLight source
The light source of the projector uses lasers, and has the following characteristics.
ffDepending on the operating environment temperature, the luminance of the light source will decrease.
The higher the temperature becomes, the more the luminance of the light source decreases.
ffThe luminance of the light source will decrease by duration of usage.
If brightness is noticeably reduced and the light source does not turn on, ask your dealer to clean inside the
projector or replace the light source unit.
r
rComputer and external device connections
When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords
and shielded cables as well.
26 - ENGLISH
Accessories
Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the
number of accessories.
Wireless/wired remote control unit <1> For Taiwan
(N2QAYA000150) (1JP1RZ970) <1>
CD-ROM <1>
Power cord
(TXFSX01RXQZ)
(Operating Instructions are included.)

AAA/R03 or AAA/LR03 battery <2>
(TXFSX01RXRZ)
(For remote control unit)

(TXFSX03VARZ)
Lens cover <1>
(Only for models with lens)
(6103626291)
(TXFSX02UTRZ)
Attention
ff After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.
ff Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.
ff For missing accessories, consult your dealer.
ff Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from small children.
Note
ff The type and number of the supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the
product.
ff The model numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
ENGLISH - 27
Optional accessories
Optional accessories (product name) Model No.

Zoom Lens ET‑ELW20, ET‑ELT22, ET‑ELS20*1, ET‑ELT23, ET‑ELW22
Projection lens
Fixed-focus Lens ET‑ELW21
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings)
Ceiling Mount Bracket ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)
ET‑PKE301B (Projector Mount Bracket)*2
Early Warning Software
ET‑SWA100 Series*3
(Basic license/3-year license)
Digital Interface Box ET‑YFB100G
DIGITAL LINK Switcher ET‑YFB200G
Replacement Filter Unit ET‑RFM100
Wireless Module ET‑WM300*4
*1 This product is equivalent to the lens attached to the projector models with standard zoom lens. The availability of this product
varies depending on the country. For details, contact your dealer.
*2 When the projector is mounted to the existing Ceiling Mount Bracket (in combination with the Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High
Ceilings) or ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), and the Model No.: ET‑PKE300B (Projector Mount Bracket)), it is necessary to
replace the drop-prevention wire rope with the one corresponding to this projector. Consult your dealer.
Drop-prevention set (service model no.: DPPW1004ZA/X1)
*3 The suffix of the Model No. differs according to the license type.
*4 The availability of this product varies depending on the country. For details, contact your dealer.
Note
ff The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
28 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1 Preparation — About your projector
About your projector

Remote control
Front Top
24
1 12
2
3
4
5 5
6 13
7
20 Bottom
16 21
8 17 22
18 23 25
9 14
19
10 15
11
1 Power <v/b> button 12 <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button

(v: Standby, b: Power on) Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned the image.
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the [PROGRESS] is displayed while in automatic adjustment.
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode. (x page 74)
Sets the projector to projection mode when the power is Also used for cancel operation during digital zoom and the
switched off (standby mode). operation of the Memory Viewer screen, or while the standby
2 Remote control indicator screen for Panasonic APPLICATION input is displayed.
Blinks if any button in the remote control is pressed. During MIRRORING input, the receiving device name and the
URL to access the projector are displayed at the top left of the
3 Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
screen. (x page 184)
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift of the lens.
(x page 68) 13 <FUNCTION> button
Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button.
4 <MENU> button/<RETURN> button/<ENTER> button/
(x page 76)
asqw buttons
Used to navigate through the menu screen. (x page 80) 14 <TEST PATTERN> button
asqw buttons are also used to enter the password in Displays the test pattern. (x page 76)
[SECURITY] or enter characters. 15 <ID SET> button
5 <VOL-> button/<VOL+> button Sets the ID number of the remote control in a multiple projector
Adjusts the volume of the built-in speaker and the audio output. environment. (x page 34)
(x page 73) 16 <SCREEN ADJ> button
6 <DEFAULT> button Used to correct the distortion of the projected image. (x pages
Resets the content of the displayed sub-menu to the factory 74, 94)
default. (x page 81) 17 <FREEZE> button
7 Input selection buttons (<HDMI 1>, <HDMI 2>, <DIGITAL Used when pausing the image and turning off the audio.
LINK>, <RGB1/2>, <VIDEO>, <NETWORK/USB>) (x page 73)
Switches the input signal to project. (x page 67) 18 <P-TIMER> button
8 Number (<0> - <9>) buttons Operates the presentation timer function. (x page 76)
Used for entering an ID number or a password in a multiple 19 <STATUS> button
projector environment. Displays the projector information.
9 <ON SCREEN> button 20 <D.ZOOM+> button/<D.ZOOM-> button
Switches the on-screen display function on (display) or off Enlarges or reduces the image. (x page 75)
(hide). (x page 73) 21 <SHUTTER> button
10 <ID ALL> button Used when temporarily turning off the image and audio.
Used to simultaneously control all the projectors with a (x page 72)
single remote control in a multiple projector environment. 22 <MUTE> button
(x page 34) Used when temporarily turning off the audio. (x page 72)
11 <ECO> button 23 <ASPECT> button
Displays the setting screen relating to ECO management. (x Switches the aspect ratio of the image. (x page 76)
pages 77, 114)
24 Remote control signal transmitter
ENGLISH - 29
25 Remote control wired terminal

This is a terminal used to connect to the projector via a cable
when the remote control is used as a wired remote control.
(x page 34)
Attention
ff Do not drop the remote control.
ff Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.
ff Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.
ff Observe the following instructions that are indicated on the caution label at the back of the remote control:
gg Do not use old battery with new one.
gg Do not use batteries other than the type specified.
gg Be sure the batteries are inserted properly.
For other instructions, read the instructions related to batteries that are described in “Read this first!”.
Caution label at the back of the remote control
Note
ff When operating the remote control by directly pointing at the remote control signal receiver of the projector, operate the remote control
within a distance approximately 30 m (98'5") from the remote control signal receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±30°
vertically and horizontally, but the effective control range may be reduced.
ff If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.
ff The signal will be reflected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reflection loss due to the screen material.
ff If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as fluorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use
it in a place distant from the light source.
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink if the projector receives a remote control signal.
30 - ENGLISH
Projector body
Front Side
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
7 8 8 8
Rear
9 10 9 16
11 12 13 14 15 8
Top Bottom
17 18 19
20
Projection direction
1 Remote control signal receiver (front) 9 Air exhaust port

2 Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> 10 Connecting terminals (x page 33)
Indicates the status of the power. 11 Remote control signal receiver (rear)
3 Light source indicator <LIGHT> 12 <MAIN POWER> switch
Indicates the status of the light source. Turns on/off the main power.
4 Temperature indicator <TEMP> 13 <AC IN> terminal
Indicates the internal temperature status. Connect the supplied power cord.
5 Filter indicator <FILTER> 14 Speaker
Indicates the status of the air filter unit.
15 Security slot
6 Projection lens This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security
7 Adjustable feet cables.
Adjusts the projection angle. 16 Air filter cover
8 Air intake port There is the air filter unit inside.
ENGLISH - 31
17 Luminance sensor (x page 88) 19 Top slide cover

18 Control panel (x page 32) There is the wireless module connection terminal inside.
(x page 51)
20 Burglar hook port
Attaches a burglar prevention cable, etc.
Attention
ff Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
The components may deteriorate faster if cooling inside the projector is inhibited.
rrControl panel
1 6
2
3
3
4 7
5 8
1 Power <v/b> button 5 <ENTER> button

(v: Standby, b: Power on) Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned 6 <INPUT SELECT> button
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the Switches the input signal to project. (x page 67)
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
7 <LENS/CANCEL> button
Sets the projector to projection mode when the power is
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift of the lens.
switched off (standby mode).
(x page 68)
2 <MENU> button Also used for cancel operation during digital zoom and
Displays or hides the main menu. (x page 80) operation in the Memory Viewer screen, or while the standby
Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed. screen for MIRRORING input or Panasonic APPLICATION input
3 <VOL-> button/<VOL+> button is displayed.
Adjusts the volume of the built-in speaker and the audio output. 8 asqw buttons
(x page 73) Selects an item in the menu screen, changes the setting, and
4 <SHUTTER> button adjusts the level.
Used to turn off the image and audio temporarily. (x page 72) Also used to enter a password in the [SECURITY] menu or
enter characters.
32 - ENGLISH
rrConnecting terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 <DC OUT> terminal 7 <VIDEO IN> terminal

This is the USB terminal only used for power supply. (DC 5 V, This is a terminal to input video signal.
maximum 2.0 A) 8 <HDMI 1 IN> terminal/<HDMI 2 IN> terminal
This can be used when the projector is in projecting status and This is a terminal to input the HDMI signal.
when power is to be supplied to the wireless display adapter,
9 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal
etc.
This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the
2 <RGB 1 IN> terminals (<G/Y>, <B/PB>, <R/PR>, <SYNC/HD>, external control circuit.
<VD>)
10 <MONITOR OUT> terminal
This is a terminal to input the RGB signal or YCBCR/YPBPR
This is a terminal to output the RGB signal or the YCBCR/
signal.
YPBPR signal input in the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2
3 <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal IN> terminal. When the input is switched to RGB1 or RGB2,
This is a terminal to connect the USB memory when using corresponding input signal is output.
the Memory Viewer function, pairing function, or data cloning
11 <SERIAL IN> terminal
function. (x pages 186, 195)
This is the RS‑232C compatible terminal to externally control
4 <LAN> terminal the projector by connecting a computer.
This is the LAN terminal to connect to the network.
12 <AUDIO IN 1> terminal/<AUDIO IN 2> terminal
This also supports the image transfer from the image transfer
This is a terminal to input audio.
application software. (x page 154)
13 <AUDIO IN 3> terminal
5 <RGB 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input audio signal. There are right input
This is a terminal to input the RGB signal or YCBCR/YPBPR
<R> and left input <L>.
signal.
14 <VARIABLE AUDIO OUT> terminal
6 <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal
This is a terminal to output the audio signal input to the
This is a terminal to connect a device that transmits video
projector.
signal or audio signal via the LAN terminal. Also, this is the LAN
terminal to connect to the network. 15 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to connect the remote control with a cable
when controlling the projector with a wired remote control.
Attention
ff When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
The signal may deteriorate due to the effect of noise or cable length.
ff The <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside the projector. When using both the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal, configure the system to prevent them from being connected to the same network directly or via the
peripheral devices such as a hub or twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ENGLISH - 33
Chapter 1 Preparation — Preparing the remote control
Preparing the remote control

Inserting and removing the batteries
(ii)
(i)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Open the cover. (Fig. 1)
2) Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first). (Fig. 2)
ffWhen removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.
When using the multiple projectors

When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
When using the projectors by setting the ID numbers, set the ID number of the projector body after initial settings
have been completed. Then, set the ID number of the remote control. For initial settings, refer to “When the initial
setting screen is displayed” (x page 61).
The factory default ID number of the projector (projector body and remote control) is set to [ALL], so you can use
it as it is. Set the ID numbers of the projector body and remote control as necessary.
For details on setting the ID number of the remote control, refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control”
(x page 77).
Note
ff Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].
Connecting the remote control to the projector with a cable

To control the projector with a wired remote control, connect the remote control wired terminal of the remote
control with the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal of the projector with commercially available M3 stereo mini plug cable.
This is effective when using the projector in location where there is an obstacle between the projector and the
remote control or location that is affected by the outside light.
ffThe wireless remote control cannot be used when a cable is connected to the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal of the
projector.
M3 stereo mini jack cable (commercially

available)
Remote control
Connecting to the remote control wired terminal
Connecting terminals
Attention
ff Use a cable that is 15 m (49'3") or shorter, with 2 core shielded. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds
15 m (49'3") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.
34 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2 Getting Started
This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections.
ENGLISH - 35
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Setting up
Setting up
Installation mode
The installation modes of the projector are as follows. Set [FRONT/REAR]/[FLOOR/CEILING] in the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] (x page 113) depending on the installation mode.
Setting on a desk/floor and projecting forward Setting on a desk/floor and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item Setting value Menu item Setting value

[FRONT/REAR] [FRONT] [FRONT/REAR] [REAR]
[FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [FLOOR] [FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [FLOOR]
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear

[FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [CEILING] [FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [CEILING]
Portrait setting and projecting forward Portrait setting and projecting from rear

Set in accordance with the image Set in accordance with the image
[FLOOR/CEILING] [FLOOR/CEILING]
to project. to project.
Note
ff In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu vertically, go to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] (x page 106) and change the
[OSD ROTATION] setting.
ff The projector has a built-in angle sensor. The attitude of the projector is automatically detected by setting [FLOOR/CEILING] to [AUTO] in
the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].
36 - ENGLISH
rrAngle sensor
The range of the installation attitude that is detected by the angle sensor built-in the projector is as follows.
Floor standing installation
30°
Ceiling mount installation
30°
Floor standing installation

Projection direction
Parts for installation (optional)

The optional Ceiling Mount Bracket is required. The Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for
High Ceilings) or ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)) is used together with the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:
ET‑PKE301B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKE301B (Projector
Mount Bracket)
When the projector is mounted to the existing Ceiling Mount Bracket (in combination with the Model No.:
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings) or ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), and the Model No.: ET‑PKE300B (Projector
Mount Bracket)), it is necessary to replace the drop-prevention wire rope with the one corresponding to this
projector. Consult your dealer.
ffBe sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket specified for this projector.
ffRefer to the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket when installing and setting up the projector.
Attention
ff To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket must be carried out by your dealer or a qualified
technician.
ENGLISH - 37
Projected image and throw distance

Install the projector referring to the projected image size and projection distance. Image size and image position
can be adjusted in accordance with the screen size and screen position.
ffFollowing illustration is prepared on the assumption that the projected image size and position have been
aligned to fit full in the screen.
Projected image
SD Screen L1
SH
SH
L (LW/LT)
H
SW
L1
L (LW/LT)
SW
Screen
L (LW/LT)*1 Projection distance

L1 Lens protrusion dimension
SH Projected image height
SW Projected image width
H Distance from the lens center to the bottom edge of the projected image
SD Projected image size
*1 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used

LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
(Unit: m)
Projection lens Model No. Dimension for L1 (approximate value)
Standard zoom lens / ET‑ELS20 0.015
ET‑ELW21 0.005
ET‑ELW22 0.050
ET‑ELW20 0.035
ET‑ELT22 0.036
ET‑ELT23 0.032
Attention
ff Before setting up, read “Precautions for use” (x page 20).
ff Do not use the projector and the high-power laser equipment in the same room. The LCD panel may be damaged if a laser beam hits the
projection lens surface.
38 - ENGLISH
[SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] projection range
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)
Screen Screen
Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side) Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)
Projection distance Projection distance

Arc radius Arc radius
Screen Screen
Arc center Arc center
Screen Screen
Projection distance Projection distance

Arc radius Arc radius
ENGLISH - 39
PT‑MZ770
[KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used Only [CURVED

Only [KEYSTONE] used*1
together CORRECTION] used
Projection lens Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
Model No. keystone keystone keystone keystone Min. value Min. value Min. value Min. value
correction correction correction correction of R2/L2 of R3/L3 of R2/L2 of R3/L3
angle α (°) angle β (°) angle α (°) angle β (°)
Standard zoom
±25 ±30 ±20 ±15 0.9 1.8 0.5 1.0
lens/ET‑ELS20
ET‑ELW21 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1.0 2.6
ET‑ELW22 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1.0 2.6
ET‑ELW20 ±25 ±30 ±20 ±15 1.2 3.1 0.7 1.8
ET‑ELT22 ±25 ±30 ±20 ±15 0.6 1.1 0.3 0.6
ET‑ELT23 ±25 ±30 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.7 0.2 0.4
*1 When [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] are used simultaneously, correction cannot be made exceeding total of 55°.
PT‑MW730
[KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used Only [CURVED

Only [KEYSTONE] used*1
together CORRECTION] used
Projection lens Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
Model No. keystone keystone keystone keystone Min. value Min. value Min. value Min. value
correction correction correction correction for R2/L2 for R3/L3 for R2/L2 for R3/L3
angle α (°) angle β (°) angle α (°) angle β (°)
Standard zoom
±35 ±35 ±20 ±15 0.9 1.8 0.5 1.0
lens/ET‑ELS20
ET‑ELW21 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1.0 2.6
ET‑ELW22 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1.0 2.6
ET‑ELW20 ±35 ±35 ±20 ±15 1.2 3.1 0.7 1.8
ET‑ELT22 ±35 ±35 ±20 ±15 0.6 1.1 0.3 0.6
ET‑ELT23 ±35 ±35 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.7 0.2 0.4
*1 When [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] are used simultaneously, correction cannot be made exceeding total of 55°.
Note
ff When [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.
ff Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.
40 - ENGLISH
Projection distance of each projection lens

A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.
When [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified image size.
PT‑MZ770
rrWhen the screen aspect ratio is 16:10

(Unit: m)
Fixed-
Lens type Zoom Lens focus
Lens
Standard zoom
Projection lens Model No. ET‑ELW22 ET‑ELW20 ET‑ELT22 ET‑ELT23 ET‑ELW21
lens/ET‑ELS20
Throw ratio*1 1.61‑2.76:1 0.786‑0.983:1 1.21‑1.66:1 2.72‑4.48:1 4.44‑7.12:1 0.764:1
Projected image size Projection distance (L)
Height Width Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Diagonal (SD) Fixed
(SH) (SW) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT)
1.016 (40") 0.538 0.862 1.36 2.35 ― ― 1.02 1.41 2.29 3.81 3.72 6.03 0.63
1.270 (50") 0.673 1.077 1.71 2.95 ― ― 1.29 1.77 2.89 4.79 4.70 7.59 0.80
1.524 (60") 0.808 1.292 2.06 3.55 1.00 1.26 1.55 2.14 3.49 5.77 5.68 9.15 0.97
1.778 (70") 0.942 1.508 2.42 4.15 1.18 1.48 1.82 2.50 4.09 6.75 6.66 10.71 1.14
2.032 (80") 1.077 1.723 2.77 4.76 1.35 1.69 2.09 2.87 4.69 7.73 7.64 12.27 1.32
2.286 (90") 1.212 1.939 3.12 5.36 1.53 1.91 2.36 3.23 5.30 8.71 8.63 13.83 1.49
2.540 (100") 1.346 2.154 3.48 5.96 1.71 2.13 2.63 3.60 5.90 9.69 9.61 15.39 1.66
3.048 (120") 1.615 2.585 4.18 7.16 2.06 2.56 3.16 4.33 7.10 11.65 11.57 18.51 2.00
3.810 (150") 2.019 3.231 5.24 8.96 2.58 3.22 3.97 5.42 8.90 14.59 14.52 23.19 2.52
5.080 (200") 2.692 4.308 7.01 11.96 3.46 4.30 5.31 7.25 11.91 19.49 19.43 30.99 3.38
6.350 (250") 3.365 5.385 8.77 14.96 4.34 5.39 6.65 9.07 14.91 24.39 24.34 38.79 4.24
7.620 (300") 4.039 6.462 10.54 17.97 5.21 6.48 7.99 10.90 17.92 29.29 29.25 46.59 5.10
8.890 (350") 4.712 7.539 12.30 20.97 6.09 7.56 9.33 12.73 20.92 34.19 34.16 54.39 5.95
10.160 (400") 5.385 8.616 14.07 23.97 6.97 8.65 10.67 14.55 23.93 39.09 39.07 62.19 6.81
Standard zoom lens/

ET‑ELW21
Projection lens Model No. ET‑ELS20/ET‑ELW20/ ET‑ELW22
(Fixed)
ET‑ELT22/ET‑ELT23
Projected image size
Height Width Height position (H)*2
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW)
1.016 (40") 0.538 0.862 -0.09 - 0.63 ― 0.27
1.270 (50") 0.673 1.077 -0.11 - 0.79 ― 0.34
1.524 (60") 0.808 1.292 -0.14 - 0.95 -0.08 - 0.89 0.40
1.778 (70") 0.942 1.508 -0.16 - 1.10 -0.09 - 1.04 0.47
2.032 (80") 1.077 1.723 -0.18 - 1.26 -0.11 - 1.18 0.54
2.286 (90") 1.212 1.939 -0.21 - 1.42 -0.12 - 1.33 0.61
2.540 (100") 1.346 2.154 -0.23 - 1.58 -0.13 - 1.48 0.67
3.048 (120") 1.615 2.585 -0.27 - 1.89 -0.16 - 1.78 0.81
3.810 (150") 2.019 3.231 -0.34 - 2.36 -0.20 - 2.22 1.01
5.080 (200") 2.692 4.308 -0.46 - 3.15 -0.27 - 2.96 1.35
6.350 (250") 3.365 5.385 -0.57 - 3.94 -0.34 - 3.70 1.68
7.620 (300") 4.039 6.462 -0.69 - 4.73 -0.40 - 4.44 2.02
8.890 (350") 4.712 7.539 -0.80 - 5.51 -0.47 - 5.18 2.36
10.160 (400") 5.385 8.616 -0.92 - 6.30 -0.54 - 5.92 2.69
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size.
*2 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑ELW21) is attached, the lens shift is not possible, therefore the height position (H) becomes SH/2.
ENGLISH - 41

(Unit: m)
Fixed-
Lens
Standard zoom
lens/ET‑ELS20
Throw ratio*1 1.61‑2.76:1 0.787‑0.984:1 1.21‑1.66:1 2.73‑4.49:1 4.44‑7.12:1 0.765:1
Diagonal (SD) Fixed
1.016 (40") 0.498 0.886 1.40 2.42 ― ― 1.05 1.45 2.36 3.92 3.83 6.20 0.65
1.270 (50") 0.623 1.107 1.76 3.04 ― ― 1.32 1.82 2.97 4.92 4.83 7.81 0.83
1.524 (60") 0.747 1.328 2.12 3.65 1.03 1.30 1.60 2.20 3.59 5.93 5.84 9.41 1.00
1.778 (70") 0.872 1.550 2.49 4.27 1.21 1.52 1.87 2.57 4.21 6.94 6.85 11.01 1.18
2.032 (80") 0.996 1.771 2.85 4.89 1.39 1.74 2.15 2.95 4.83 7.95 7.86 12.62 1.35
2.286 (90") 1.121 1.992 3.21 5.51 1.57 1.97 2.43 3.32 5.45 8.95 8.87 14.22 1.53
2.540 (100") 1.245 2.214 3.57 6.12 1.75 2.19 2.70 3.70 6.06 9.96 9.88 15.82 1.71
3.048 (120") 1.494 2.657 4.30 7.36 2.11 2.64 3.25 4.45 7.30 11.97 11.90 19.03 2.06
3.810 (150") 1.868 3.321 5.39 9.21 2.66 3.31 4.08 5.58 9.15 15.00 14.93 23.84 2.59
5.080 (200") 2.491 4.428 7.20 12.29 3.56 4.42 5.46 7.45 12.24 20.03 19.98 31.86 3.47
6.350 (250") 3.113 5.535 9.02 15.38 4.46 5.54 6.83 9.33 15.33 25.07 25.02 39.87 4.36
7.620 (300") 3.736 6.641 10.83 18.47 5.36 6.66 8.21 11.20 18.42 30.10 30.07 47.89 5.24
8.890 (350") 4.358 7.748 12.65 21.55 6.26 7.77 9.59 13.08 21.51 35.14 35.12 55.91 6.12
10.160 (400") 4.981 8.855 14.46 24.64 7.16 8.89 10.97 14.96 24.60 40.18 40.17 63.92 7.00
Standard zoom lens/

ET‑ELW21
(Fixed)
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW)
1.016 (40") 0.498 0.886 -0.12 - 0.62 ― 0.25
1.270 (50") 0.623 1.107 -0.15 - 0.77 ― 0.31
1.524 (60") 0.747 1.328 -0.18 - 0.93 -0.12 - 0.87 0.37
1.778 (70") 0.872 1.550 -0.21 - 1.08 -0.15 - 1.02 0.44
2.032 (80") 0.996 1.771 -0.24 - 1.24 -0.17 - 1.16 0.50
2.286 (90") 1.121 1.992 -0.27 - 1.39 -0.19 - 1.31 0.56
2.540 (100") 1.245 2.214 -0.30 - 1.55 -0.21 - 1.45 0.62
3.048 (120") 1.494 2.657 -0.37 - 1.86 -0.25 - 1.74 0.75
3.810 (150") 1.868 3.321 -0.46 - 2.32 -0.31 - 2.18 0.93
5.080 (200") 2.491 4.428 -0.61 - 3.10 -0.42 - 2.91 1.25
6.350 (250") 3.113 5.535 -0.76 - 3.87 -0.52 - 3.63 1.56
7.620 (300") 3.736 6.641 -0.91 - 4.65 -0.62 - 4.36 1.87
8.890 (350") 4.358 7.748 -1.07 - 5.42 -0.73 - 5.08 2.18
10.160 (400") 4.981 8.855 -1.22 - 6.20 -0.83 - 5.81 2.49
42 - ENGLISH

(Unit: m)
Fixed-
Lens
Standard zoom
lens/ET‑ELS20
Throw ratio*1 1.93‑3.32:1 0.947‑1.18:1 1.46‑2.00:1 3.28‑5.39:1 5.34‑8.56:1 0.922:1
Diagonal (SD) Fixed
1.016 (40") 0.610 0.813 1.54 2.67 ― ― 1.16 1.60 2.61 4.33 4.24 6.85 0.72
1.270 (50") 0.762 1.016 1.94 3.35 ― ― 1.46 2.01 3.29 5.43 5.35 8.62 0.91
1.524 (60") 0.914 1.219 2.34 4.03 1.14 1.43 1.77 2.43 3.97 6.54 6.46 10.39 1.11
1.778 (70") 1.067 1.422 2.74 4.71 1.34 1.68 2.07 2.84 4.65 7.65 7.57 12.15 1.30
2.032 (80") 1.219 1.626 3.14 5.39 1.54 1.92 2.37 3.25 5.33 8.76 8.68 13.92 1.50
2.286 (90") 1.372 1.829 3.54 6.07 1.74 2.17 2.68 3.67 6.01 9.87 9.79 15.68 1.69
2.540 (100") 1.524 2.032 3.94 6.75 1.94 2.42 2.98 4.08 6.69 10.98 10.91 17.45 1.89
3.048 (120") 1.829 2.438 4.74 8.11 2.33 2.91 3.59 4.91 8.05 13.20 13.13 20.98 2.28
3.810 (150") 2.286 3.048 5.94 10.15 2.93 3.65 4.50 6.15 10.09 16.53 16.47 26.28 2.86
5.080 (200") 3.048 4.064 7.94 13.55 3.92 4.88 6.02 8.21 13.49 22.08 22.03 35.11 3.83
6.350 (250") 3.810 5.080 9.94 16.95 4.91 6.11 7.53 10.28 16.90 27.62 27.58 43.94 4.80
7.620 (300") 4.572 6.096 11.94 20.34 5.91 7.34 9.05 12.35 20.30 33.17 33.14 52.77 5.78
8.890 (350") 5.334 7.112 13.93 23.74 6.90 8.57 10.57 14.41 23.70 38.72 38.70 61.60 6.75
10.160 (400") 6.096 8.128 15.93 27.14 7.89 9.80 12.09 16.48 27.10 44.27 44.26 70.43 7.72
Standard zoom lens/

ET‑ELW21
(Fixed)
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW)
1.016 (40") 0.610 0.813 -0.10 - 0.71 ― 0.30
1.270 (50") 0.762 1.016 -0.13 - 0.89 ― 0.38
1.524 (60") 0.914 1.219 -0.16 - 1.07 -0.09 - 1.01 0.46
1.778 (70") 1.067 1.422 -0.18 - 1.25 -0.11 - 1.17 0.53
2.032 (80") 1.219 1.626 -0.21 - 1.43 -0.12 - 1.34 0.61
2.286 (90") 1.372 1.829 -0.23 - 1.60 -0.14 - 1.51 0.69
2.540 (100") 1.524 2.032 -0.26 - 1.78 -0.15 - 1.68 0.76
3.048 (120") 1.829 2.438 -0.31 - 2.14 -0.18 - 2.01 0.91
3.810 (150") 2.286 3.048 -0.39 - 2.67 -0.23 - 2.51 1.14
5.080 (200") 3.048 4.064 -0.52 - 3.57 -0.30 - 3.35 1.52
6.350 (250") 3.810 5.080 -0.65 - 4.46 -0.38 - 4.19 1.91
7.620 (300") 4.572 6.096 -0.78 - 5.35 -0.46 - 5.03 2.29
8.890 (350") 5.334 7.112 -0.91 - 6.24 -0.53 - 5.87 2.67
10.160 (400") 6.096 8.128 -1.04 - 7.13 -0.61 - 6.71 3.05
ENGLISH - 43
PT‑MW730

(Unit: m)
Fixed-
Lens
Standard zoom
lens/ET‑ELS20
Throw ratio*1 1.63‑2.79:1 0.789‑0.987:1 1.23‑1.68:1 2.76‑4.54:1 4.49‑7.21:1 0.774:1
Diagonal (SD) Fixed
1.016 (40") 0.538 0.862 1.38 2.38 ― ― 1.03 1.42 2.32 3.85 3.76 6.10 0.64
1.270 (50") 0.673 1.077 1.74 2.99 ― ― 1.30 1.79 2.93 4.85 4.76 7.68 0.81
1.524 (60") 0.808 1.292 2.09 3.60 1.01 1.26 1.58 2.16 3.54 5.84 5.75 9.26 0.99
1.778 (70") 0.942 1.508 2.45 4.21 1.18 1.48 1.85 2.53 4.14 6.83 6.75 10.84 1.16
2.032 (80") 1.077 1.723 2.81 4.82 1.36 1.70 2.12 2.90 4.75 7.82 7.74 12.42 1.33
2.286 (90") 1.212 1.939 3.16 5.42 1.54 1.92 2.39 3.27 5.36 8.81 8.73 14.00 1.51
2.540 (100") 1.346 2.154 3.52 6.03 1.71 2.14 2.66 3.64 5.97 9.80 9.73 15.58 1.68
3.048 (120") 1.615 2.585 4.24 7.25 2.06 2.57 3.21 4.38 7.19 11.79 11.72 18.73 2.03
3.810 (150") 2.019 3.231 5.31 9.07 2.59 3.23 4.02 5.48 9.01 14.76 14.70 23.47 2.55
5.080 (200") 2.692 4.308 7.09 12.11 3.47 4.32 5.38 7.33 12.05 19.72 19.67 31.36 3.42
6.350 (250") 3.365 5.385 8.88 15.15 4.35 5.41 6.74 9.17 15.10 24.68 24.64 39.26 4.29
7.620 (300") 4.039 6.462 10.66 18.20 5.23 6.50 8.10 11.02 18.14 29.64 29.61 47.15 5.16
8.890 (350") 4.712 7.539 12.45 21.24 6.11 7.59 9.46 12.86 21.18 34.59 34.58 55.04 6.03
10.160 (400") 5.385 8.616 14.24 24.28 6.99 8.68 10.82 14.71 24.22 39.55 39.55 62.94 6.89
Standard zoom lens/

ET‑ELW21
(Fixed)
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW)
1.016 (40") 0.538 0.862 -0.09 - 0.63 ― 0.27
1.270 (50") 0.673 1.077 -0.11 - 0.79 ― 0.34
1.524 (60") 0.808 1.292 -0.14 - 0.95 -0.08 - 0.89 0.40
1.778 (70") 0.942 1.508 -0.16 - 1.10 -0.09 - 1.04 0.47
2.032 (80") 1.077 1.723 -0.18 - 1.26 -0.11 - 1.18 0.54
2.286 (90") 1.212 1.939 -0.21 - 1.42 -0.12 - 1.33 0.61
2.540 (100") 1.346 2.154 -0.23 - 1.58 -0.13 - 1.48 0.67
3.048 (120") 1.615 2.585 -0.27 - 1.89 -0.16 - 1.78 0.81
3.810 (150") 2.019 3.231 -0.34 - 2.36 -0.20 - 2.22 1.01
5.080 (200") 2.692 4.308 -0.46 - 3.15 -0.27 - 2.96 1.35
6.350 (250") 3.365 5.385 -0.57 - 3.94 -0.34 - 3.70 1.68
7.620 (300") 4.039 6.462 -0.69 - 4.73 -0.40 - 4.44 2.02
8.890 (350") 4.712 7.539 -0.80 - 5.51 -0.47 - 5.18 2.36
10.160 (400") 5.385 8.616 -0.92 - 6.30 -0.54 - 5.92 2.69
44 - ENGLISH

(Unit: m)
Fixed-
Lens
Standard zoom
lens/ET‑ELS20
Throw ratio*1 1.63‑2.80:1 0.790‑0.987:1 1.23‑1.68:1 2.76‑4.54:1 4.50‑7.21:1 0.775:1
Diagonal (SD) Fixed
1.016 (40") 0.498 0.886 1.42 2.45 ― ― 1.06 1.46 2.39 3.96 3.87 6.28 0.66
1.270 (50") 0.623 1.107 1.79 3.08 ― ― 1.34 1.84 3.01 4.98 4.90 7.90 0.84
1.524 (60") 0.747 1.328 2.15 3.70 1.04 1.30 1.62 2.22 3.64 6.00 5.92 9.52 1.01
1.778 (70") 0.872 1.550 2.52 4.33 1.22 1.52 1.90 2.60 4.26 7.02 6.94 11.15 1.19
2.032 (80") 0.996 1.771 2.89 4.95 1.40 1.75 2.18 2.98 4.89 8.04 7.96 12.77 1.37
2.286 (90") 1.121 1.992 3.25 5.58 1.58 1.97 2.46 3.36 5.51 9.06 8.98 14.39 1.55
2.540 (100") 1.245 2.214 3.62 6.20 1.76 2.20 2.74 3.74 6.14 10.08 10.00 16.01 1.73
3.048 (120") 1.494 2.657 4.35 7.45 2.12 2.65 3.30 4.50 7.39 12.12 12.05 19.26 2.09
3.810 (150") 1.868 3.321 5.46 9.33 2.67 3.32 4.14 5.64 9.27 15.18 15.11 24.13 2.62
5.080 (200") 2.491 4.428 7.29 12.45 3.57 4.44 5.53 7.53 12.39 20.27 20.22 32.24 3.52
6.350 (250") 3.113 5.535 9.13 15.58 4.47 5.56 6.93 9.43 15.52 25.37 25.33 40.35 4.41
7.620 (300") 3.736 6.641 10.96 18.70 5.38 6.68 8.33 11.33 18.64 30.46 30.44 48.47 5.30
8.890 (350") 4.358 7.748 12.80 21.83 6.28 7.80 9.72 13.22 21.77 35.56 35.55 56.58 6.19
10.160 (400") 4.981 8.855 14.63 24.95 7.19 8.93 11.12 15.12 24.90 40.66 40.66 64.69 7.09
Standard zoom lens/

ET‑ELW21
(Fixed)
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW)
1.016 (40") 0.498 0.886 -0.12 - 0.62 ― 0.25
1.270 (50") 0.623 1.107 -0.15 - 0.77 ― 0.31
1.524 (60") 0.747 1.328 -0.18 - 0.93 -0.12 - 0.87 0.37
1.778 (70") 0.872 1.550 -0.21 - 1.08 -0.15 - 1.02 0.44
2.032 (80") 0.996 1.771 -0.24 - 1.24 -0.17 - 1.16 0.50
2.286 (90") 1.121 1.992 -0.27 - 1.39 -0.19 - 1.31 0.56
2.540 (100") 1.245 2.214 -0.30 - 1.55 -0.21 - 1.45 0.62
3.048 (120") 1.494 2.657 -0.37 - 1.86 -0.25 - 1.74 0.75
3.810 (150") 1.868 3.321 -0.46 - 2.32 -0.31 - 2.18 0.93
5.080 (200") 2.491 4.428 -0.61 - 3.10 -0.42 - 2.91 1.25
6.350 (250") 3.113 5.535 -0.76 - 3.87 -0.52 - 3.63 1.56
7.620 (300") 3.736 6.641 -0.91 - 4.65 -0.62 - 4.36 1.87
8.890 (350") 4.358 7.748 -1.07 - 5.42 -0.73 - 5.08 2.18
10.160 (400") 4.981 8.855 -1.22 - 6.20 -0.83 - 5.81 2.49
ENGLISH - 45

(Unit: m)
Fixed-
Lens
Standard zoom
lens/ET‑ELS20
Throw ratio*1 1.96‑3.36:1 0.951‑1.19:1 1.48‑2.02:1 3.32‑5.46:1 5.41‑8.67:1 0.933:1
Diagonal (SD) Fixed
1.016 (40") 0.610 0.813 1.57 2.70 ― ― 1.18 1.62 2.64 4.38 4.29 6.94 0.73
1.270 (50") 0.762 1.016 1.97 3.39 ― ― 1.48 2.04 3.33 5.50 5.41 8.73 0.93
1.524 (60") 0.914 1.219 2.38 4.08 1.15 1.44 1.79 2.45 4.02 6.62 6.54 10.51 1.12
1.778 (70") 1.067 1.422 2.78 4.77 1.35 1.68 2.10 2.87 4.71 7.75 7.67 12.30 1.32
2.032 (80") 1.219 1.626 3.18 5.46 1.55 1.93 2.41 3.29 5.40 8.87 8.79 14.09 1.52
2.286 (90") 1.372 1.829 3.59 6.15 1.75 2.18 2.71 3.71 6.08 9.99 9.92 15.87 1.71
2.540 (100") 1.524 2.032 3.99 6.84 1.94 2.42 3.02 4.12 6.77 11.11 11.04 17.66 1.91
3.048 (120") 1.829 2.438 4.80 8.21 2.34 2.92 3.64 4.96 8.15 13.36 13.29 21.24 2.30
3.810 (150") 2.286 3.048 6.01 10.28 2.94 3.66 4.56 6.21 10.22 16.73 16.67 26.60 2.89
5.080 (200") 3.048 4.064 8.04 13.72 3.94 4.90 6.10 8.30 13.66 22.34 22.30 35.53 3.88
6.350 (250") 3.810 5.080 10.06 17.16 4.93 6.13 7.64 10.39 17.10 27.95 27.92 44.47 4.86
7.620 (300") 4.572 6.096 12.08 20.61 5.93 7.37 9.18 12.48 20.55 33.57 33.55 53.40 5.85
8.890 (350") 5.334 7.112 14.10 24.05 6.93 8.60 10.72 14.57 23.99 39.18 39.18 62.34 6.83
10.160 (400") 6.096 8.128 16.12 27.49 7.92 9.84 12.25 16.66 27.43 44.79 44.80 71.28 7.81
Standard zoom lens/

ET‑ELW21
(Fixed)
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW)
1.016 (40") 0.610 0.813 -0.10 - 0.71 ― 0.30
1.270 (50") 0.762 1.016 -0.13 - 0.89 ― 0.38
1.524 (60") 0.914 1.219 -0.16 - 1.07 -0.09 - 1.01 0.46
1.778 (70") 1.067 1.422 -0.18 - 1.25 -0.11 - 1.17 0.53
2.032 (80") 1.219 1.626 -0.21 - 1.43 -0.12 - 1.34 0.61
2.286 (90") 1.372 1.829 -0.23 - 1.60 -0.14 - 1.51 0.69
2.540 (100") 1.524 2.032 -0.26 - 1.78 -0.15 - 1.68 0.76
3.048 (120") 1.829 2.438 -0.31 - 2.14 -0.18 - 2.01 0.91
3.810 (150") 2.286 3.048 -0.39 - 2.67 -0.23 - 2.51 1.14
5.080 (200") 3.048 4.064 -0.52 - 3.57 -0.30 - 3.35 1.52
6.350 (250") 3.810 5.080 -0.65 - 4.46 -0.38 - 4.19 1.91
7.620 (300") 4.572 6.096 -0.78 - 5.35 -0.46 - 5.03 2.29
8.890 (350") 5.334 7.112 -0.91 - 6.24 -0.53 - 5.87 2.67
10.160 (400") 6.096 8.128 -1.04 - 7.13 -0.61 - 6.71 3.05
46 - ENGLISH
Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens

To use a projected image size not listed in this manual, check the projected image size SD (m) and use the
respective formula to calculate projection distance.
All the units for the formula are m. (Value obtained by the following calculation formula contains a slight error.)
When calculating a projection distance using image size designation (value in inches), multiply the value in inches
by 0.0254 and substitute it into SD in the formula for calculating the projection distance.
PT‑MZ770
rrZoom Lens
Projection distance (L) formula

Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.61 - 2.76:1 16:10 = 1.389961 x SD - 0.054882 = 2.363976 x SD - 0.048228
Standard zoom lens/ET‑ELS20 1.61 - 2.76:1 16:9 = 1.428602 x SD - 0.054882 = 2.429695 x SD - 0.048228
1.93 - 3.32:1 4:3 = 1.573583 x SD - 0.054882 = 2.676260 x SD - 0.048228
0.786 - 0.983:1 16:10 = 0.690394 x SD - 0.048460 = 0.855787 x SD - 0.045477
ET‑ELW22 0.787 - 0.984:1 16:9 = 0.709587 x SD - 0.048460 = 0.879578 x SD - 0.045477
0.947 - 1.18:1 4:3 = 0.781595 x SD - 0.048460 = 0.968837 x SD - 0.045477
1.21 - 1.66:1 16:10 = 1.055748 x SD - 0.055497 = 1.437441 x SD - 0.053400
ET‑ELW20 1.21 - 1.66:1 16:9 = 1.085098 x SD - 0.055497 = 1.477402 x SD - 0.053400
1.46 - 2.00:1 4:3 = 1.195197 x SD - 0.055497 = 1.627323 x SD - 0.053400
2.72 - 4.48:1 16:10 = 2.366220 x SD - 0.114022 = 3.858307 x SD - 0.112874
ET‑ELT22 2.73 - 4.49:1 16:9 = 2.432001 x SD - 0.114022 = 3.965568 x SD - 0.112874
3.28 - 5.39:1 4:3 = 2.678780 x SD - 0.114022 = 4.367992 x SD - 0.112874
4.44 - 7.12:1 16:10 = 3.866693 x SD - 0.212284 = 6.141575 x SD - 0.210772
ET‑ELT23 4.44 - 7.12:1 16:9 = 3.974187 x SD - 0.212284 = 6.312311 x SD - 0.210772
5.34 - 8.56:1 4:3 = 4.377480 x SD - 0.212284 = 6.952874 x SD - 0.210772
rrFixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑ELW21)
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
0.764:1 16:10 = 0.676299 x SD - 0.057678
ET‑ELW21 0.765:1 16:9 = 0.695100 x SD - 0.057678
0.922:1 4:3 = 0.765630 x SD - 0.057678
PT‑MW730
rrZoom Lens
Projection distance (L) formula

Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.63 - 2.79:1 16:10 = 1.406181 x SD - 0.050400 = 2.394370 x SD - 0.049700
Standard zoom lens/ET‑ELS20 1.63 - 2.80:1 16:9 = 1.445236 x SD - 0.050400 = 2.460945 x SD - 0.049700
1.96 - 3.36:1 4:3 = 1.591906 x SD - 0.050400 = 2.710613 x SD - 0.049700
0.789 - 0.987:1 16:10 = 0.693071 x SD - 0.048417 = 0.859134 x SD - 0.045448
ET‑ELW22 0.790 - 0.987:1 16:9 = 0.712338 x SD - 0.048417 = 0.883018 x SD - 0.045448
0.951 - 1.19:1 4:3 = 0.784610 x SD - 0.048417 = 0.972607 x SD - 0.045448
1.23 - 1.68:1 16:10 = 1.070236 x SD - 0.055400 = 1.453031 x SD - 0.053400
ET‑ELW20 1.23 - 1.68:1 16:9 = 1.099996 x SD - 0.055400 = 1.493425 x SD - 0.053400
1.48 - 2.02:1 4:3 = 1.211591 x SD - 0.055400 = 1.644945 x SD - 0.053400
2.76 - 4.54:1 16:10 = 2.395157 x SD - 0.113900 = 3.904055 x SD - 0.112800
ET‑ELT22 2.76 - 4.54:1 16:9 = 2.461732 x SD - 0.113900 = 4.012598 x SD - 0.112800
3.32 - 5.46:1 4:3 = 2.711504 x SD - 0.113900 = 4.419694 x SD - 0.112800
4.49 - 7.21:1 16:10 = 3.913819 x SD - 0.212700 = 6.215236 x SD - 0.210700
ET‑ELT23 4.50 - 7.21:1 16:9 = 4.022638 x SD - 0.212700 = 6.388031 x SD - 0.210700
5.41 - 8.67:1 4:3 = 4.430747 x SD - 0.212700 = 7.036131 x SD - 0.210700
ENGLISH - 47
rrFixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑ELW21)
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
0.774:1 16:10 = 0.684213 x SD - 0.057231
ET‑ELW21 0.775:1 16:9 = 0.703228 x SD - 0.057231
0.933:1 4:3 = 0.774582 x SD - 0.057231
Adjusting adjustable feet

Install the projector on a flat surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the
projection screen is rectangular.
If the screen is tilted downward, extend the front adjustable feet so that the projected image becomes rectangular.
The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction.
Adjustable feet can be extended by turning them as shown in the figure. Turning them in the opposite direction will
return them to the original position.
Maximum adjustable range

Adjustable feet: 23 mm (29/32") each
Attention
ff Be careful not to block the intake/exhaust ports with your hands or any objects when adjusting the adjustable feet while the light source is
on. (x page 31)
48 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens
Removing/attaching the projection lens

Removing and attaching methods of the projection lens are same for both standard zoom lenses and optional
lenses.
Move the lens position to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens. (x page 69)
Attention
ff Replace the projection lens after turning off the projector.
ff Do not touch the electric contacts of the projection lens. Dust or dirt may cause poor contact.
ff Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
ff Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.
ff Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens hole cover (only model with the lens sold separately) and the lens cover attached to
the projection lens.
ff Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from the use of projection lenses which are not
manufactured by Panasonic. Always use the standard zoom lens supplied with the projector or the specified projection lens.
Removing the projection lens

Remove the projection lens using the following procedure.
Top slide cover fixing screw
Lens release lever

Projection lens
Top slide cover
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Slide the top slide cover. (Fig. 1)

ffTurn the top slide cover fixing screw (x 1) counterclockwise until it turns freely using a Philipps screwdriver,
and slowly slide the top slide cover.
2) While pressing the lens release lever, turn the projection lens counterclockwise to the end, and
remove the projection lens. (Fig. 2)
Attention
ff Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.
ENGLISH - 49
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens
Attaching the projection lens

Attach the projection lens using the following procedure.
Projection lens Red dot

Projection lens
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Align the mark (red dot) on the projection lens with the mark (red dot) on the projector, and insert it all
the way in. (Fig. 1)
2) Turn the projection lens clockwise to the end. (Fig. 2)
Attention
ff Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to confirm that it does not come out.
50 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Attaching the Wireless Module
Attaching the Wireless Module

No.: ET‑WM300).
Attaching the Wireless Module

Top slide cover
Wireless module
Top slide cover fixing screw attachment line
Top slide cover attachment line Wireless Module Wireless module Wireless module fixing screw
connecting terminal
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Turn off the power of the projector.

ffAlways follow the procedure of “Switching off the projector” (x page 66) when turning off the power.
2) Remove the top slide cover. (Fig. 1)
ffTurn the top slide cover fixing screw (x 1) counterclockwise until it turns freely using a Philipps screwdriver,
slide the top slide cover until the top slide cover attachment line is visible, and remove it.
3) Attach the Wireless Module. (Fig. 2)
i) Insert the Wireless Module into the wireless module connection terminal of the projector.
ii) Confirm that the edge of the Wireless Module is aligned to the wireless module attachment line, and securely
fix the Wireless Module with the fixing screw (x 1) supplied with the Wireless Module.
4) Attach the top slide cover. (Fig. 1)

ffAlign the top slide cover to the top slide cover attachment line, and attach it by sliding.
ffSecurely tighten the top slide cover fixing screw (x 1) using a Phillips screwdriver.
Attention
ff When tightening the screws, use a Phillips screwdriver or similar, and do not use power screwdriver or impact screwdriver.
ff Do not attach any USB device other than the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300).
ENGLISH - 51
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Connecting
Connecting
Before connecting
ffBefore connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.
ffTurn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.
ffTake note of the following points before connecting the cables. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.
ggWhen connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby
metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.
ggDo not use unnecessarily long cables to connect a device to the projector or to the projector body. The longer
the cable, the more susceptible to noise it becomes. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an
antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.
ggWhen connecting cables, connect GND first, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a
straight manner.
ffAcquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied
with the device nor available as an option.
ffIf video signals from video equipment contain too much jitter, the images on the screen may wobble. In this
case, a time base corrector (TBC) must be connected.
ffIf synchronization signals output from computers or video equipment are disrupted due to changes in the video
output setting or other reasons, colors of projected images may be temporarily disrupted.
ffThe signal that can be connected to the projector is video signal, YCBCR/YPBPR signal, analog RGB signal
(synchronization signal is TTL level), and digital signal.
ffSome computer models or graphic cards are not compatible with the projector.
ffUse a cable compensator when you connect devices to the projector using long cables. Otherwise the projector
may not project the image properly.
ffFor details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”
(x page 220).
<RGB 2 IN> terminal pin assignment and signal name
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(1) R/PR (9) +5 V
(11) (15) (2) G/Y (10) GND
(3) B/PB (11) GND
(4) ― (12) DDC data
(6) (10)
(5) GND (13) SYNC/HD
(6) GND (14) VD
(1) (5) (7) GND (15) DDC clock
(8) GND
<MONITOR OUT> terminal pin assignment and signal name
(1) R/PR (9) ―
(11) (15) (2) G/Y (10) GND
(3) B/PB (11) GND
(4) ― (12) ―
(6) (10)
(5) GND (13) SYNC/HD
(6) GND (14) VD
(1) (5) (7) GND (15) ―
(8) GND
52 - ENGLISH
<HDMI 1 IN> terminal/<HDMI 2 IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
(1) T.M.D.S data 2+ (11) T.M.D.S clock shield
(2) T.M.D.S data 2 shield (12) T.M.D.S clock-
Even-numbered pins of (2) to (18)
(3) T.M.D.S data 2- (13) CEC
(2) (18)
(4) T.M.D.S data 1+ (14) ―
(5) T.M.D.S data 1 shield (15) SCL
(6) T.M.D.S data 1- (16) SDA
DDC/CEC
(7) T.M.D.S data 0+ (17)
(1) (19) GND
(8) T.M.D.S data 0 shield (18) +5 V
Odd-numbered pins of (1) to (19)
(9) T.M.D.S data 0- (19) Hot plug detection
(10) T.M.D.S clock+
Connecting example: AV equipment

VCR
(with built-in TBC)
Blu-ray disc player
Audio device
Attention
ff Be sure to use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
gg Use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC).
gg Use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.
ff The image may be disrupted when nonstandard burst signal is connected. In such a case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between
the projector and the external devices.
Note
ff For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI
standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.
ff The <HDMI 1 IN>/<HDMI 2 IN> terminals can be connected to an external device with the DVI‑D terminal by using an HDMI/DVI conversion
cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and image may not be projected.
ff The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
ENGLISH - 53
Connecting example: Computers

Computer
Control computer
Computer
USB memory
Control computer
Computer
Attention
ff When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially
available shielded cables.
Note
ff The <HDMI 1 IN>/<HDMI 2 IN> terminals can be connected to an external device with the DVI‑D terminal by using an HDMI/DVI conversion
cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and image may not be projected.
ff If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate
the projector.
54 - ENGLISH
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK

Twisted-pair-cable transmitter based on the communication standard HDBaseTTM such as the optional DIGITAL
LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) uses the twisted pair cable to transmit
input images, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signal, and the projector can input such digital signal to the
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
Computer
Projector connecting terminals Example of twisted-pair-cable transmitter Computer cable (commercially

available)
HDMI cable (commercially

available)
Hub
VCR (with built-in TBC) Blu-ray disc player
Control computer*1
*1 Control target is the projector or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. The control itself may not be possible depending on the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter. Check the operating instructions of the device to be connected.
Attention
ff Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
gg Use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC).
gg Use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.
ff The image may be disrupted when nonstandard burst signal is connected. In such a case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between
the projector and the external devices.
ff Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector. Image may
be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
ff For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
gg Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
gg Shielded type (including connectors)
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
ff When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
ff Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
ff When connecting to the projector using a twisted-pair-cable transmitter (receiver) of other manufacturers, do not place another twisted-pair-
cable transmitter between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers and the projector. This may cause image to be disrupted.
ff The <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside the projector. When using both the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal, configure the system to prevent them from being connected to the same network directly or via the
peripheral devices such as a hub or twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ff Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
ff To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
ff Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
ff When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
ff After laying the cable, confirm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] is displayed
in green, which indicates a normal quality. (x page 140)
ENGLISH - 55
Note
ff The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
ff The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1") for the signal with
resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission
distance will be 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach
communication method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency
148.5 MHz) for the long-reach communication method. If this distance is exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur
in LAN communication. Please note that Panasonic does not support the use of the projector outside the maximum transmission distance.
When connecting with the long reach, video signal or distance that can be transmitted may be restricted, depending on the specification of
the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ff For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the Panasonic
website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/). Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set
by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of
other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
56 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations to start with.
ENGLISH - 57
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Switching on/off the projector

Connecting the power cord
Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely fixed to the <AC IN> terminal of the projector body to
prevent it from being removed easily.
Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the supplied power cord to the
projector.
Use the power cord matching with the power supply voltage and the shape of the outlet.
For details of power cord handling, refer to “Read this first!” (x page 5).
Note
ff The supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
How to attach the power cord
For Taiwan
1) Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal at the rear of the projector and the power cord connector,
and insert the connector completely in the correct direction.
For other countries or regions
1) Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal at the rear of the projector and the power cord connector,
and insert the connector completely in the correct direction.
2) Make sure that the tabs on the left and right sides of the connector are securely engaged with the
lugs of the <AC IN> terminal.
Attention
ff Do not use the power cord with its tabs damaged. Doing so may result in a poor contact between the power cord connector and the <AC
IN> terminal. Consult your dealer for repairing the power cord.
How to remove the power cord
For Taiwan
1) Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch at the rear of the projector is set to <OFF> side, and remove
the power plug from the outlet.
2) While holding the power cord connector, pull out the power cord from the <AC IN> terminal of the
projector.
For other countries or regions
58 - ENGLISH
1) Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch at the rear of the projector is set to <OFF> side, and remove
the power plug from the outlet.
2) Remove the power cord connector from the <AC IN> terminal of the projector while pressing the side
tabs.
Attention
ff Do not pull out the connector with its left and right tabs engaged with the lugs of <AC IN> terminal. If you pull it out while the tabs are
engaged with the lugs, the tip of the tabs may be damaged. If the tabs are damaged, stop using the projector and consult your dealer for
repair of the power cord.
Power indicator
Indicate the status of the power. Check the status of the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> before operating
the projector.
Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicator status Projector status

Off The main power is switched off.
The power is switched off. (standby mode)
Projection will start when the power <v/b> button is pressed.
ff The setting of the projector is as follows.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP]
Lit is set to [OFF]
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [AUDIO SETTING] → [IN STANDBY MODE] is
set to [OFF]
ff The projector may not operate when the light source indicator <LIGHT> or the
temperature indicator <TEMP> is blinking. (x page 198)
The power is switched off. (standby mode)
Projection will start when the power <v/b> button is pressed.
ff The projector is set to one of the following. Power consumption is high.
Red
is set to [ON]
set to [ON]
ff The indicator will change to a red light when the specified time has elapsed after the
Blinking projector enters the standby mode if the projector is set as following.
The specified time is a time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO
MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
is set to [ON]
set to [OFF]
ff The projector may not operate when the light source indicator <LIGHT> or the
temperature indicator <TEMP> is blinking. (x page 198)
Green Lit Projecting.
The projector is preparing to switch off the projector.
Orange Lit
The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)
Note
ff While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.
ff For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on. Turn on the
power again after the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks in red.
ENGLISH - 59
ff The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks in red). Refer to “Power
consumption” (x page 223) for the power consumption.
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink if the projector receives a remote control signal.
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink slowly in green while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed).
Switching on the projector

When using the optional projection lens, attach the projection lens before switching on the projector.
Remove the lens cover first.
4)
4)
3) 1) 2)
1) Connect the power cord to the projector.
2) Connect the power plug to an outlet.
3) Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power.
ffThe power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks in red, and the projector enters the standby
mode.
4) Press the power <v/b> button.
ffThe power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in green and the image is soon projected on the screen.
Note
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], it takes longer for the projection to
start after the power is turned on, compared to when set to [NORMAL].
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], and the power is turned on before
the specified time elapses after the projector enters the standby mode, an image will be projected approximately one second after the power
is turned on.
The specified time is a time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
ff When the power is turned on or an input signal is switched, you may here a high-frequency driving sound. This is not a malfunction.
ff If the power was turned off at the previous use by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by using the breaker directly
while projecting, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights up in green and an image is projected after a while when the power
is turned on by pressing the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by turning the breaker on with the power plug connected to the
outlet. This applies only when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIAL STARTUP] is set to [LAST MEMORY].
60 - ENGLISH
When the initial setting screen is displayed

When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
→ [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed immediately after
the projection is started, and then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed. Set them according to the
circumstances.
In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.
If you press the <MENU> button while the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed, you can go back to the
previous screen.
Same operation is available by pressing the <RETURN> button.
Focus adjustment
Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly.
Adjustment of the zoom and shift may also be necessary.
For details, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” (x page 68).
1) Press asqw to adjust the focus.

LENS
FOCUS
ADJUST
2) Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (display language)

Select the language to show on the screen.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the display language from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.
1) Press asqw to select the display language.

INITIAL SETTING 1/6
Қазақша
SELECT
ENTER SET
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
ENGLISH - 61
Initial setting (installation setting)

Set [FRONT/REAR] and [FLOOR/CEILING] in [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode.
Refer to “Installation mode” (x page 36) for details.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[PROJECTION METHOD].
1) Press qw to switch the setting.

INITIAL SETTING 2/6
PROJECTION METHOD
FRONT/REAR FRONT
FLOOR/CEILING AUTO
Change the projection method (FRONT/REAR,

FLOOR/CEILING) if the screen display is upside down
or inverted.
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET
Initial setting (standby mode)

Set the operation mode during standby. The factory default setting is [NORMAL], which allows you to use the
network function during standby. To keep power consumption low during standby, set this item to [ECO].
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO
MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY MODE].

INITIAL SETTING 3/6
STANDBY MODE NORMAL
When set to ECO, network functions and some RS-232C

commands are not available during standby.
CHANGE
ENTER SET
Note
ff The preceding initial setting screen is displayed when the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase. When the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the [STANDBY MODE] setting before executing is displayed.
62 - ENGLISH
Initial setting (screen setting)

Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →
[SCREEN SETTING].

ffProceed to Step 4) when [16:10] is selected.
INITIAL SETTING 4/6
SCREEN FORMAT 16:10
SCREEN POSITION
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
CHANGE
ENTER SET
2) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].

INITIAL SETTING 4/6
SCREEN FORMAT 16:9
SCREEN POSITION 0
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET
3) Press qw to adjust.
ffThe display position can be adjusted vertically when [16:9] is selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], and adjusted
horizontally when [4:3] is selected.
ENGLISH - 63
Initial setting (time zone)

Set [TIME ZONE] in accordance with the country or region where you use the projector.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE
AND TIME]. The current settings are displayed in [LOCAL DATE] and [LOCAL TIME].

INITIAL SETTING 5/6
TIME ZONE +09:00
LOCAL DATE 20XX/01/01
LOCAL TIME 12 : 34 : 56
Please set up a time zone according to the area of your
country or region.
CHANGE
ENTER SET
Note
ff In the factory default setting, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korea Standard Time). Change the setting of the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.
Initial setting (date and time)

Set the local date and time. After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME].
To set the date and time automatically, refer to “Setting the date and time automatically” (x page 118).
1) Press as to select an item.

INITIAL SETTING 6/6
YEAR 20XX
MONTH 1
DAY 1
HOUR 12
MINUTE 34
SECOND 56
Please set the date and time of the built-in clock of the
projector.
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET
3) Press the <ENTER> button.

ffConfirm the setting value and complete the initial setting.
64 - ENGLISH
Making adjustments and selections

It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
2) 6)
1) 8) 5)
7) 9)
3)
2)
3)
4)
1) 5) 7) 8) 9)
1) Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the projected image. (x page 68)
2) Change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the
installation mode. (x page 36)
ffRefer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 80) for the operation of the menu screen.
3) Select the input by pressing the input selection button on the remote control or the control panel.
ffThe buttons that can be used on the remote control or the control panel are as follows.
Remote control:
<HDMI 1> button, <HDMI 2> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <RGB1/2> button, <VIDEO> button,
<NETWORK/USB> button
Control panel:
<INPUT SELECT> button
ffFor details of operation for input selection, refer to “Selecting the input signal” (x page 67).
4) Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet. (x page 48)
5) Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the position of the projected image. (x page 68)
6) If the input signal is the analog RGB signal, press the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button to
automatically adjust the projection position.
7) Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust the projected image size to match the screen.
8) Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus. (x page 68)
9) Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom to match the projected image size to the screen.
Note
ff When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER
DATA] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed immediately after the projection is started, and then the [INITIAL SETTING]
screen is displayed. For details, refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed” (x page 61).
ENGLISH - 65
Switching off the projector
3) 1)
4) 1)
2)
2)
1) Press the power <v/b> button.

ffThe [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] confirmation screen is displayed.
2) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
(Or press the power <v/b> button again.)
ffProjection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body
lights in orange. (The fan keeps running.)
3) Wait for a few seconds until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> of the projector body lights/
blinks in red.
4) Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.
Note
ff For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on.
ff Even when the power <v/b> button is pressed and the projector is switched off, the projector consumes power if the main power
of the projector is on.
When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], use of some functions is restricted,
but the power consumption during standby mode can be conserved.
ff While projecting, the power can be turned off by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch, or by directly using the breaker
under conditions where the <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector cannot be switched off/on easily such as while installing on the ceiling.
However, the settings or adjustments performed right before the power is turned off may not be reflected.
66 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Projecting
Projecting
Check the external device connection (x page 52) and the power cord connection (x page 58), and turn on
the power (x page 60) to start projection. Select the image to project, and adjust appearance of the projected
image.
Selecting the input signal

The input of the image to project can be switched. Method to switch the input is as follows.
ffPress the input selection button on the remote control and directly specify the input of the image to project.
ffPress the <INPUT SELECT> button on the control panel to display the input selection screen, and select the
input to project from the list.
Remote control Control panel
Switching the input directly with the remote control

The input for projection can be switched by directly specifying it with the input selection button on the remote
control.
1) Press the input selection button (<HDMI 1>, <HDMI 2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <RGB1/2>, <VIDEO>,
<NETWORK/USB>).
Switches the input to HDMI1.

<HDMI 1>
The image of the signal input to the <HDMI 1 IN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to HDMI2.
<HDMI 2>
The image of the signal input to the <HDMI 2 IN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
<DIGITAL LINK>
The image of the signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to RGB1 or RGB2.
<RGB1/2> Switches to the other input when one input has already been selected. The image of the signal input
to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to VIDEO.
<VIDEO>
The image of the signal input to the <VIDEO IN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING.
If any of the input is selected already, the input is switched every time the button is pressed.
ff MEMORY VIEWER: Displays the still image or movie recorded in the USB memory using the
Memory Viewer function. (x page 186)
<NETWORK/USB> ff Panasonic APPLICATION: Displays the image transferred via wireless LAN/wired LAN from a
computer (including iPad/iPhone/iPod touch, Android device) using the Panasonic image transfer
application software. (x page 179)
ff MIRRORING: Displays the image transferred via wireless LAN from the Miracast supported device
using the mirroring function. (x page 182)
Attention
ff Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the Blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.
Set the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
ff Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu →
[ASPECT].
Note
ff To switch the input to MIRRORING, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300).
For details on how to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300), refer to “Attaching the Wireless Module” (x page 51).
ff When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal, the input on the DIGITAL LINK output supported device changes each time the <DIGITAL LINK> button is pressed. The input
can also be changed using the RS‑232C control command.
For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers, switch the input on the projector to DIGITAL LINK, and then switch the input on
the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
For details of the RS‑232C operation command, refer to “<SERIAL IN> terminal” (x page 215).
ENGLISH - 67
Switching the input by displaying the input selection screen

The input for projection can be selected by displaying the input selection screen using the <INPUT SELECT>
button on the control panel.
1) Press the <INPUT SELECT> button on the control panel.

ffThe input selection screen is displayed.
INPUT SELECT
RGB1
RGB2
VIDEO
HDMI1
HDMI2
DIGITAL LINK
MEMORY VIEWER
Panasonic APPLICATION
MIRRORING
SELECT
ENTER SET
2) Press as to select the input for projection, and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff [MIRRORING] is displayed when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300) is attached.
ff The input can also be switched by pressing the <INPUT SELECT> button while the input selection screen is displayed.
The input will switch each time you press the <INPUT SELECT> button.
ff If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, the input
selection menu for the DIGITAL LINK output supported device is displayed when the <ENTER> button is pressed while the DIGITAL LINK
input is selected in the input selection screen.
ff If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, the DIGITAL
LINK logo and the input name selected in the DIGITAL LINK output supported device are displayed in the display section of the [DIGITAL
LINK] in the input selection screen.
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift

Adjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift if the image projected to the screen or its position is shifted even if the
projector and the screen are set up in the correct positions.
Using the control panel
1) Press the <LENS/CANCEL> button on the control panel.

ffPressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].
2) Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
Using the remote control
1) Press the lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) on the remote control.
ffPressing the <FOCUS> button: Adjusts the focus (adjustment of the lens focus position).
ffPressing the <ZOOM> button: Adjusts the zoom (adjustment of the lens zoom position).
ffPressing the <SHIFT> button: Adjusts the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens).
2) Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
CAUTION
During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in the opening around the lens.
Your hand may get caught, resulting in an injury.
Note
ff The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw for approximately three seconds or longer.
ff It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
68 - ENGLISH
ff Only [FOCUS] is displayed in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the displayed characters are
unreadable due to incorrect focus. (Factory default)
The displayed color for [FOCUS] differs depending on the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD
DESIGN].
ff The current position and maximum movable range are displayed with a bar scale during shift adjustment.
Also, the out of movable range from current position is indicated by red bar.
The triangular mark under the bar scale indicates the home position.
Moving the lens position to the home position

To move the lens position to the home position, operate in following procedure.
1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the [SHIFT] adjustment screen is displayed.
ffThe [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed.
LENS
HOME POSITION
ENTER EXECUTE
MENU CANCEL
2) Press the <ENTER> button while the [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed (approximately five
seconds).
ff[PROGRESS] is displayed in the [HOME POSITION] screen, and the lens position returns to the home
position.
Note
ff The home position of the lens is used when the lens is replaced or when the projector is stored, and it is not the optical center of the screen.
ff The [HOME POSITION] screen can also be displayed by pressing the <LENS/CANCEL> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button
on the remote control for three seconds or longer.
Adjustment range by the lens position shift (optical shift)

Based on the standard projection position using the optical axis shift function, the projection position can be
adjusted in the range shown in the following figure.
Following figure shows the adjustment range when the projector is installed on the floor.
Standard zoom lens/ET‑ELS20/ET‑ELW20/
Projection lens Model No. ET‑ELW22
Projected image width H Projected image width H

0.35 H 0.35 H 0.30 H 0.30 H
0.30 H 0.30 H 0.25 H 0.25 H
Projected image height V
Projected image height V

0.67 V
0.60 V
0.19 V 0.19 V
0.15 V 0.15 V
Lens shift range

0.67 V
0.60 V
Standard projection position Standard projection position
ENGLISH - 69
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Using the USB memory
Using the USB memory

This projector supports the attachment of the USB memory. Attach the USB memory to the <VIEWER/PAIRING>
terminal when using the Memory Viewer function, the pairing function, or the data cloning function.
Note
ff For details on the Memory Viewer function, refer to “Projecting with MEMORY VIEWER input” (x page 186).
ff For pairing of the projector and the USB memory, refer to “Using the pairing function” (x page 195).
ff For how to use the image transfer application software “Plug and Share” allowing to easily connect via the wireless LAN by pairing the
commercially available USB memory with the projector, refer to following URL.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
For the method of pairing the projector and the USB memory, refer to “Using the pairing function” (x page 195). By pairing, the connection
information between the image transfer application software “Plug and Share”, and the projector and the USB memory is written into the
USB memory.
ff For the data cloning function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] (x page 127).
Notes on use
Observe following.
ffDo not disassemble or modify the USB memory.
ffDo not apply strong impact on the USB memory.
ffDo not pour liquid such as water or get it wet.
ffDo not place foreign object into the terminal section.
ffDo not touch the metal terminal with hand or metal.
ffDo not leave the USB memory in a place with high humidity or dust.
ffDo not leave the USB memory in a place where static electricity or electromagnetic radiation is generated.
ffStore the USB memory appropriately in a location that small children cannot reach.
ffImmediately remove the USB memory from the projector when smoke or odor is noticed, and contact the
manufacturer.
ffDo not remove the USB memory from the projector while reading or writing the data.
USB memory that can be used with the projector

This projector supports the commercially available USB 2.0 compatible USB memory formatted in FAT16 or
FAT32.
ffOnly the single partition structure is supported.
Note
ff The USB memory with a security function cannot be used for pairing.
ff Free space of approximately 30 MB is required in the USB memory used for pairing.
Attaching the USB memory
1) Insert the USB memory all the way in to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
Attention
ff Take care of the orientation of the terminal when inserting the USB memory so that it will not get damaged.
ff Do not use a USB extension cable or a USB hub, and directly insert the USB memory into the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal of the
projector.
ff Do not insert the USB memory into the <DC OUT> terminal. The USB memory cannot be used on the <DC OUT> terminal.
Note
ff The USB memory can be attached even when the projector is turned on.
ff The pairing data is written to the USB memory when the pairing function is used. If there is a write protection switch on the USB memory to
be used, set it so that data can be written.
70 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Using the USB memory
Removing the USB memory
1) Remove the USB memory after confirming that the indicator on the USB memory is not blinking.
Attention
ff The blinking of the indicator of the USB memory attached to the projector is indicating that the projector is accessing (reading or writing) the
USB memory. Do not remove the USB memory from the projector when the indicator is blinking.
ff The access status to the USB memory cannot be confirmed when a USB memory without the monitoring function such as indicator is used.
In such case, remove the USB memory after waiting for one of following is completed.
gg Turn off the projector.
gg When using the Memory Viewer function, switch the input to anything other than the MEMORY VIEWER input.
gg When using the pairing function, wait until the pairing data write completion message is displayed on the standby screen.
ENGLISH - 71
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
Operating with the remote control
Using the shutter function

If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission, for example, it is possible
to turn off the image and audio temporarily.
button
1) Press the <SHUTTER> button.

ffThe image and audio disappear.
ffThis operation can be also performed by pressing the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.
2) Press the <SHUTTER> button again.
ffThe image and audio reappear.
Note
ff The fade-in/fade-out time of the image can be set in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] (x page 110).
ff To output audio while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed), set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [AUDIO SETTING]
(x page 123) → [IN SHUTTER] to [ON].
ff The light source may be lit dimly due to warm up when the shutter function is used in the operating environment temperature of around 0 °C
(32 °F).
Using the mute function

Audio can be temporarily turned off.
button
1) Press the <MUTE> button.

ffThe audio is muted.
2) Press the <MUTE> button again.
ffThe audio is turned on.
72 - ENGLISH
Adjusting the volume

Adjust the volume of audio output.
button
1) Press the <VOL-> button/<VOL+> button on the remote control.
<VOL+> Increases the volume.

<VOL-> Decreases the volume.
Note
ff This operation can be also performed using qw on the control panel.
Using the freeze function

The projected image can be paused and audio can be turned off regardless of the playback of the external device.
button
1) Press the <FREEZE> button.

ffThe image freezes and audio is muted.
2) Press the <FREEZE> button again.
ffFreezing of the image is canceled and audio is turned on.
Note
ff [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.
ff When freezing of the moving image is canceled, the image may disappear or be disrupted temporarily.
Using the on-screen display function

Turn off the on-screen display function (no display) when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-screen
display, such as the menu or the input terminal name.
button
1) Press the <ON SCREEN> button.

ffThe on-screen display disappears.
2) Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.
ffThe on-screen display appears.
Note
ff If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the on-screen
display is turned on.
ENGLISH - 73
Using the automatic setup function

The image position when the HDMI signal is input, or the dot clock, clock phase, and image position when the
analog RGB signal is input can be adjusted automatically. (Analog RGB signal is a signal structured with dots just
like the computer signal.)
It is recommended to input an image with bright white borders at the edges and high-contrast black and white
characters when the automatic adjustment is being performed.
Avoid using images that include halftones or gradation, such as photographs and computer graphics.
button
1) Press the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button.

ff[PROGRESS] is displayed while automatic setup is being executed.
ff[COMPLETE] is displayed when automatic setup has completed without any problem.
Note
ff The clock phase may shift even if it has completed without any incident. In such a case, adjust the [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK PHASE]
(x page 93).
ff The automatic setup may not correctly adjust when a image that cannot determine the edge or dark image is input. In such a case, adjust
the following settings.
gg [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [INPUT RESOLUTION] (x page 98)
gg [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK PHASE] (x page 93)
gg [POSITION] menu → [SHIFT] (x page 91)
ff Adjust special signals according to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [AUTO SETUP] (x page 101).
ff Automatic adjustment may not be possible depending on the computer model.
ff Automatic adjustment may not be possible for the synchronization signal for composite sync or SYNC ON GREEN.
ff Image may be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment, but this is not a malfunction.
ff Adjustment is required for each input signal.
ff Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button or the <RETURN> button during the automatic adjustment
operation.
ff Even if a signal possible to perform the automatic setup is being input, it may not be able to adjust correctly if the automatic setup function is
used while the moving image is being input.
ff If the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SIGNAL SEARCH] is set to [ON], the signal search function is activated when the <AUTO SETUP/
CANCEL> button is pressed while no signal is input.
For details of the signal search function, refer to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SIGNAL SEARCH] (x page 109).
Using the screen adjustment function

The [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] menu can be displayed.
Correct the distortion of the image that occurs when the projector is installed tilted or when the screen is tilted or
curved.
button
1) Press the <SCREEN ADJ> button.

ffThe [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] screen is displayed.
2) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the screen adjustment function.
[KEYSTONE] Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
[CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
[CURVED CORRECTION] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
ffThe items will also switch by pressing the <SCREEN ADJ> button.
ffProceed to Step 3) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.
ffThe [KEYSTONE] screen, the [CORNER CORRECTION] screen, or the [CURVED CORRECTION] screen
is displayed.
74 - ENGLISH
Note
ff To adjust [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION], press as to select the item to adjust, and press qw to adjust the item.
ff To adjust [CORNER CORRECTION], press as to select the item to adjust. Individual adjustment screen is displayed by pressing the
<ENTER> button. Adjust the item using asqw.
ff Only one of the [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], or [CURVED CORRECTION] setting is enabled.
ff Refer to the [POSITION] menu → [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] (x page 94) for details.
Using the digital zoom function

(When RGB signal for still images, HDMI signal for still images, or DIGITAL LINK signal for still images is input.
Or, when MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING is input.)
Enlarge the image or move the enlargement area of the image.
button
1) Press the <D.ZOOM-> button/<D.ZOOM+> button.

ffWhen executed from the remote control operation, the [DIGITAL ZOOM] individual adjustment screen is
not displayed, and the move screen is displayed.
ffWhen executed from the menu operation, the [DIGITAL ZOOM] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
For details, refer to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DIGITAL ZOOM] (x page 112).
2) Move the enlargement position or adjust the magnification with following button operation.
ffThe digital zoom is canceled when the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button on the remote control or the
<LENS/CANCEL> button on the control panel is pressed while performing the digital zoom.
Operation menu/button Operation Adjustment
Press a. The image moves down.
UPPER LEFT UPPER RIGHT Press s. The image moves up.
SELECT CENTER
LOWER LEFT LOWER RIGHT Press q. The image moves right.
Press w. The image moves left.
Move screen
Press the <MENU> button. Displays the top left corner.
Press the <RETURN> button. Displays the top right corner.
Press the <ENTER> button. Displays the center.
Press the <DEFAULT> button. Displays the bottom left corner.
Displays the bottom right
Press the <FUNCTION> button.
corner.
Remote control operation
button Press the <D.ZOOM+> button. Increases the magnification.
Press the <D.ZOOM-> button. Decreases the magnification.
a button <MENU> button <RETURN> button
ABC ABC ABC

q button w button <ENTER> button
ABC ABC ABC ABC

s button <DEFAULT> button <FUNCTION> button
ABC ABC ABC

The screen display position after the button operation
Note
ff The magnification is not displayed in the move screen.
ff The adjustment value of the digital zoom is canceled when the type of input signal is changed while performing the digital zoom.
ff The freeze function is disabled while performing the digital zoom.
ff The digital zoom will not operate in some of the still image signals.
ENGLISH - 75
Switching the image aspect ratio

Switch the image aspect ratio according to the input.
button
1) Press the <ASPECT> button.

ffThe setting will change each time you press the button.
Note
ff Refer to the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] (x page 91) for details.
Using the presentation timer function

The presentation timer can be operated.
The presentation can be performed while confirming the elapsed time or remaining time against the specified
time.
button
1) Press the <P-TIMER> button.

ffStarts the count.
2) Press the <P-TIMER> button again.
ffStops the count.
Note
ff The elapsed time or remaining time is displayed at the bottom right of the projected image while using the presentation timer.
ff The count will restart when the <P-TIMER> button is pressed while the count is stopped.
ff The presentation timer is ended when the <P-TIMER> button is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer.
ff For details such as setting of the presentation timer function, refer to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [P-TIMER] (x page 111).
Using the function button

By assigning the following functions to the <FUNCTION> button, it can be used as a simplified shortcut button.
[SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [DAYLIGHT VIEW]
button
1) Press the <FUNCTION> button.
Note
ff Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 122).
Displaying internal test pattern

To confirm the status of the projector, ten types of internal test patterns can be displayed. To display test patterns,
perform the following steps.
button
1) Press the <TEST PATTERN> button.
2) Press qw to select the test pattern.
Note
ff Test patterns can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 132) for details.
ff Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing
various adjustments.
76 - ENGLISH
Using the status function

Display the status of the projector.
button
1) Press the <STATUS> button.

ffThe [STATUS] screen is displayed.
STATUS 1/3
PROJECTOR TYPE PT-MZ770
SERIAL NUMBER SW1234567
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 10000h
LIGHT RUNTIME 10000h / 10000h
CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME 1h 23m

MAIN/SUB VERSION 1.00 / 1.00
NETWORK VERSION 1.00
INTAKE AIR TEMP. 31°C/87°F
EXHAUST AIR TEMP. 31°C/87°F
LIGHT TEMP. 1 31°C/87°F
LIGHT TEMP. 2 31°C/87°F
SELF TEST NO ERRORS
ENTER SEND E-MAIL

CHANGE MENU EXIT
Note
ff The projector status can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS]
(x page 126) for details.
Using the ECO management function

Display the setting screen relating to ECO management.
button
1) Press the <ECO> button.
Note
ff Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] (x page 114) for details.
Setting ID number of the remote control

When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
After setting the ID number of the projector, set same ID number on the remote control.
The factory default ID number of the projector is set to [ALL]. When using a single projector, press the <ID
ALL> button on the remote control. Also, you can control a projector by pressing the <ID ALL> button on
the remote control even if you do not know the projector ID.
button
1) Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.
2) Within five seconds, press and set the one-digit or two-digit ID number set on the projector body
using the number (<0> - <9>) buttons.
ffIf you press the <ID ALL> button, you can control the projectors regardless of the ID number setting of the
projector body.
Attention
ff Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector body, do not press the <ID SET> button on the remote control
carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> - <9>) buttons are pressed within five seconds, the ID number returns to
its original value before the <ID SET> button was pressed.
ENGLISH - 77
ff The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead
batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.
Note
ff When the ID number of the remote control is set to [0], the projectors can be controlled regardless of the ID number setting on the projector,
same as when set to [ALL].
ff Set the ID number of the projector from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID] (x page 113).
78 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings
This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on-screen menu.
ENGLISH - 79
Chapter 4 Settings — Menu navigation
Menu navigation
The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.
Navigating through the menu
Operating procedure
button
1) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK/USB
MENU SELECT
ENTER SUB MENU
2) Press as to select an item from the main menu.

ffThe selected item is highlighted in yellow.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK/USB
MENU SELECT
ENTER SUB MENU

ffThe sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT NORMAL
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE 0
REALTIME KEYSTONE ON
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT OFF
MENU SELECT
ENTER SUB MENU
80 - ENGLISH
4) Press as to select a sub-menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.
ffSome items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw.
A B C
ffFor some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.
CONTRAST 0
ADJUST
Note
ff Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.
Same operation is available by pressing the <RETURN> button.
ff Some items cannot be adjusted or some functions cannot be used depending on the signal that is input to the projector.
The item in the menu screen is displayed in black text when it cannot be adjusted or selected.
If the item in the menu screen is displayed in black characters and the item cannot be adjusted or set, the factor causing it is displayed by
pressing the <ENTER> button while the corresponding menu is selected.
ff Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.
ff Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds.
ff For menu items, refer to “Main menu” (x page 81) and “Sub-menu” (x page 82).
ff The cursor color depends on the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD DESIGN]. The selected item
is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.
ff In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu vertically, change the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD
ROTATION].
Resetting adjustment values to the factory default

If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to
the factory default settings.
button
1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

CONTRAST 0
ADJUST
Note
ff You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.
ff To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INITIALIZE].
ff Some items cannot be reset to the factory default settings even when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed. Adjust those
items individually.
ff The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular
mark varies according to the selected input signals.
Current adjustment value
Factory default setting
Main menu
The following items are in the main menu.
When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen.
Main menu item Page
[PICTURE] 85
[POSITION] 91
[ADVANCED MENU] 97
ENGLISH - 81
Main menu item Page
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] 99
[DISPLAY OPTION] 100
[PROJECTOR SETUP] 113
[TEST PATTERN] 132
[SIGNAL LIST] 133
[SECURITY] 136
[NETWORK/USB] 140
Sub-menu
The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu.
[PICTURE]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page

[PICTURE MODE] [STANDARD]*1 85
[CONTRAST] [0] 85
[BRIGHTNESS] [0] 85
[COLOR] [0]*2 86
[TINT] [0] 86
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [DEFAULT]*2 86
[GAMMA] [0] 87
[DAYLIGHT VIEW] [AUTO]*2 88
[SHARPNESS] [+6]*2 88
[NOISE REDUCTION] [OFF]*2 88
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] [OFF]*2 89
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] [AUTO]*1 89
*1 Depends on the signal input.

*2 Depends on the [PICTURE MODE].
[POSITION]

[SHIFT] ― 91
[ASPECT] [NORMAL]*1 91
[ZOOM] ― 92
[CLOCK PHASE] [0]*1 93
[REALTIME KEYSTONE] [OFF] 93
[SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] [OFF] 94
[ADVANCED MENU]

[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] [AUTO]*1 97
[BLANKING] ― 97
[INPUT RESOLUTION] ― 98
[CLAMP POSITION] [24]*1 98
82 - ENGLISH

[RASTER POSITION] ― 98
Note
ff The factory default setting varies depending on the selected input terminal.
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]
Details (x page 99)
[DISPLAY OPTION]

[COLOR ADJUSTMENT] [OFF] 100
[COLOR CORRECTION] [OFF] 100
[SCREEN SETTING] ― 101
[AUTO SIGNAL] [OFF] 101
[AUTO SETUP] ― 101
[RGB IN] ― 102
[HDMI IN] ― 103
[DIGITAL LINK IN] ― 105
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] ― 106
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] ― 108
[SIGNAL SEARCH] [ON] 109
[BACK COLOR] [BLUE] 109
[STARTUP LOGO] [DEFAULT LOGO] 110
[SHUTTER SETTING] ― 110
[P-TIMER] ― 111
[FREEZE] ― 112
[DIGITAL ZOOM] ― 112
[PROJECTOR SETUP]

[PROJECTOR ID] [ALL] 113
[PROJECTION METHOD] ― 113
[ECO MANAGEMENT] ― 114
[LightID] [OFF] 116
[INITIAL STARTUP] [LAST MEMORY] 117
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT] [LAST USED] 117
[DATE AND TIME] ― 118
[SCHEDULE] [OFF] 119
[RS-232C] ― 120
[REMOTE1 MODE] [DEFAULT] 122
[FUNCTION BUTTON] ― 122
[LENS CALIBRATION] ― 122
[AUDIO SETTING] ― 123
[FILTER COUNTER] ― 125
[DC OUT] [ON] 126
[STATUS] ― 126
[DATA CLONING] ― 127
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] ― 130
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] ― 130
[INITIALIZE] ― 131
[SERVICE PASSWORD] ― 131
ENGLISH - 83
[TEST PATTERN]
[SIGNAL LIST]
[SECURITY]

[SECURITY PASSWORD] [OFF] 136
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] ― 136
[DISPLAY SETTING] [OFF] 136
[TEXT CHANGE] ― 137
[MENU LOCK] [OFF] 137
[MENU LOCK PASSWORD] ― 137
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] ― 138
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] ― 139
[NETWORK/USB]

[DIGITAL LINK MODE] [AUTO] 140
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS] ― 140
[DIGITAL LINK MENU] ― 141
[WIRED LAN] ― 141
[WIRELESS LAN]*1 [SIMPLE] 142
[PROJECTOR NAME] ― 146
[NETWORK CONTROL] ― 146
[MEMORY VIEWER] ― 146
[Panasonic APPLICATION] ― 148
[MIRRORING]*1 ― 150
[NETWORK STATUS] ― 151
*1 The sub-menu item can be selected when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300) is attached.
Note
ff Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector.
The item in the menu screen is displayed in black text when it cannot be adjusted or selected.
ff Display of the sub-menu item and the value of factory default setting vary depending on the selected input.
84 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [PICTURE] menu
[PICTURE] menu
On the menu screen, select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 80) for the operation of the menu screen.
[PICTURE MODE]
You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the
projector is used.
1) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[STANDARD] The image becomes suitable for moving images in general.
[DYNAMIC] The image becomes suitable for use in bright areas.
[DICOM SIM.] The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.
[BLACKBOARD] The image becomes appropriate to project on a blackboard.
[WHITE BOARD] The image becomes appropriate to project on a whiteboard.
[CINEMA] The image becomes suitable for movie contents.
[NATURAL] The image becomes appropriate to use in a dark room.
Note
ff DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the
DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and display images should not be used for medical purposes such as diagnosis.
[CONTRAST]
You can adjust the contrast of the colors.
1) Press as to select [CONTRAST].

ffThe [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

Press w. The screen becomes brighter.
-31 - +31
Press q. The screen becomes darker.
Attention
ff When it is necessary to adjust [CONTRAST] and [BRIGHTNESS], adjust the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS] first.
[BRIGHTNESS]
You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].

ffThe [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
-31 - +31
Press q. Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
ENGLISH - 85
[COLOR]
You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [COLOR].

ffThe [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Deepens colors.
-31 - +31
Press q. Weakens colors.
[TINT]
You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.
1) Press as to select [TINT].

ffThe [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color.
-31 - +31
Press q. Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.
Adjusting with color temperature
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[DEFAULT] Factory default setting.
Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” (x page 86) for
[USER]
details.
[LOW]/[HIGH] Select an item so that images become natural.
Note
ff [DEFAULT] cannot be selected when the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DICOM SIM.].
ff This item is fixed to [USER] when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR ADJUSTMENT] is set to anything other than [OFF].
Adjusting desired white balance

3) Press qw to select [USER].

ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
86 - ENGLISH
5) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].

ffThe [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].

ffThe [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.
9) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

Press w. Deepens red.
[RED]
Press q. Weakens red.
[WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 - +255 (factory default is
Press w. Deepens green. +255)
[GREEN]
Press q. Weakens green. [WHITE BALANCE LOW]: -127 - +127 (factory default is
0)
Press w. Deepens blue.
[BLUE]
Press q. Weakens blue.
Note
ff Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
Changing the [USER] name


ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].

ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe name set to color temperature is changed.
Note
ff When a name is changed, display of [USER] is also changed.
[GAMMA]
You can switch gamma mode.
1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

ffThe [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 87

Press w. The intermediate tome becomes brighter.
-8 - +7
Press q. The intermediate tone becomes darker.
[DAYLIGHT VIEW]
You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.
1) Press as to select [DAYLIGHT VIEW].

ffThe [DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
Detects the brightness of the installed environment by the luminance sensor, and automatically
[AUTO]
corrects the vividness of the image.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Corrects the image to weaken vividness.
[2] Corrects the image to medium vividness.
[3] Corrects the image to high vividness.
Note
ff [AUTO] cannot be selected when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FRONT/REAR] of [PROJECTION METHOD] is set to [REAR].
ff The luminance may not be detected correctly when an object is placed on top of the projector, blocking the luminance sensor. In such a
case, this function may not operate properly even if it is set to [AUTO].
ff When the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DICOM SIM.], the factory default value is [OFF].
[SHARPNESS]
You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [SHARPNESS].

ffThe [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Contours become sharper.
0 - +15
Press q. Contours become softer.
[NOISE REDUCTION]
You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.
1) Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].

ffThe [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Slightly corrects the noise.
[2] Moderately corrects the noise.
[3] Strongly corrects the noise.
Attention
ff When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from the original image. In such a case, set it to [OFF].
88 - ENGLISH
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image
to make the contrast optimum for the image.
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[OFF] Disables the dynamic contrast function.
[1] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.
[2] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.
The light source can be set to turn off when the brightness level of the input video signal falls below a
[USER] certain value.
Refer to “Setting the light off condition of the light source” (x page 89) for details.
Note
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LightID] is set to [EXTERNAL CONTROL] or [INTERNAL ID], [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to
[OFF].
Setting the light off condition of the light source
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select the item to set.

ffThe items in the detailed setting will switch each time you press qw.
Setting item Details
[DISABLE] Does not turn off the light source.
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER] Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the video signal being
(Setting of the waiting time input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL].
before turning off the light) [0.5s] ~ [10.0s]
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s].
[0.5s] - [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
Sets the level of the brightness of the video signal to turn off the light source
(Setting of the brightness level
[0%] ~ [5%] with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
of the signal to turn off the
Can be set in increments of 1%. (Factory setting: 0%)
light)
Note
ff [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].
ff When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again
from the state that the light source has turned off by this function.
gg When the brightness level of the video signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
gg When the input signal is gone
gg When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
ff When the image of analog signal is projected, the image may be affected by the signal noise while the brightness level of the video signal
is detected. In such case, it is determined that the signal has not fallen below even when the brightness level of the image falls below the
value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL].
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an
unstable signal is input. Set the system method matching the input signal.
ENGLISH - 89
1) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
3) Press as to select a system format.

ffAvailable system formats vary depending on the input signal.
Terminal System format
Select [AUTO], [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL‑M], [PAL‑N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].
Select [AUTO] normally. ([AUTO] will automatically determine from [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL],
<VIDEO IN> terminal
[PAL‑M], [PAL‑N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].)
Switch the setting to the appropriate TV signal format.
480/60i, 576/50i, or 576/50p
Select [RGB] or [YCBCR].
signal
<RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2
640 x 480/60 or 480/60p
IN> terminal Select [640x480/60], [480/60p YCBCR], or [480/60p RGB].
signal
Other moving image signals Select [RGB] or [YPBPR].
<HDMI 1 IN> terminal, <HDMI 480/60i, 576/50i, 480/60p, or
Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YCBCR].
2 IN> terminal, <DIGITAL 576/50p signal
LINK/LAN> terminal Other moving image signals Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YPBPR].
Note
ff For details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 220).
ff This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
90 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [POSITION] menu
[POSITION] menu
On the menu screen, select [POSITION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Note
ff When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal, adjust the shift, aspect, and clock phase from the menu of DIGITAL LINK output supported device at first.
[SHIFT]
Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image projected on the screen is still out of position even
when the positions of the projector and screen are correct.
1) Press as to select [SHIFT].

ffThe [SHIFT] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
Orientation Operation Adjustment
Press a. The image position moves up.
Vertical (up and down)

adjustment
Press s. The image position moves down.
Press w. The image position moves to the right.
Horizontal (right and left)

adjustment
Press q. The image position moves to the left.
Note
ff For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved
vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.
ff [SHIFT] cannot be adjusted when the input is MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING.
[ASPECT]
You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.
The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN
SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT]. Set [SCREEN FORMAT] first. (x page 101)
1) Press as to select [ASPECT].

ffThe [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 91
[NORMAL] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.
Identifies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signal, and automatically switches the image size
[VID AUTO]*1
between 4:3 and 16:9. This is enabled when NTSC signal is input.
[NATIVE] Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.
Display images by converting the aspect ratio to 16:9 when the standard signal is input*2. When wide
[WIDE]
signal is input*3, the images are displayed with the input aspect ratio.
Displays images with the input aspect ratio when the standard signal is input*2. When the wide signal
[4:3]
is input*3, the images are displayed with the input signal but reduced to fit into the 4:3 screen.
Displays images using the entire width of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
[H FIT] signals have the aspect ratio vertically longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN
FORMAT], the images are displayed with the top and bottom parts cut off.
Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
[V FIT] signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in
[SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off.
Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of
[FULL] the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio
converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].
*1 Only when video signal (NTSC) is input

*2 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.
*3 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
Note
ff Some size modes are not available for certain types of input signals. In case of video signal (NTSC), [NORMAL] cannot be selected.
ff If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals.
Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
ff If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that
adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original
copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio
adjustment and zoom function.
ff If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not
be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the
creator of the images.
ff [ASPECT] cannot be set when the input is MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING.
[ZOOM]
You can adjust the image size.
The adjustments in [ZOOM] will differ depending on the setting of the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT].
When [ASPECT] is set to other than [NORMAL] and [NATIVE]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].

ffThe [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
[ON]
same magnification.
5) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

ffIf [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
Note
ff When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to [NATIVE], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.
ff [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted when the input is MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING.
When [ASPECT] is set to [NORMAL]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].
92 - ENGLISH

ffThe [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODE].
[INTERNAL] Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
[FULL] Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
5) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
[ON]
same magnification.
7) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

ffIf [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
Note
ff When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to anything other than [NORMAL], [MODE] is not displayed.
ff [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted when the input is MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING.
[CLOCK PHASE]
You can adjust the image to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [CLOCK PHASE].

ffThe [CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
ffAdjustment value will change between [0] and [+31]. Adjust the image so that the amount of interference is
at a minimum.
Note
ff Adjustment may not be possible depending on the signal.
ff There may be no optimal value if the output from the input computer is unstable.
ff There may be no optimal value when the total dot number is shifted.
ff [CLOCK PHASE] can be adjusted only when the YCBCR/YPBPR signal or the analogRGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the
<RGB 2 IN> terminal.
ff [CLOCK PHASE] cannot be adjusted when a digital signal is input.
ff The adjustment value will change to [0] when w is pressed while it was at [+31]. Also, the adjustment value will change to [+31] when q is
pressed while it was at [0].
[REALTIME KEYSTONE]
The keystone distortion that occurs when the projector is installed tilted is adjusted automatically.
1) Press as to select [REALTIME KEYSTONE].
2) Press qw to select the item to adjust.
[OFF] The real-time keystone distortion correction function is not executed automatically.
[ON] The real-time keystone distortion correction function is executed automatically.
Note
ff The keystone distortion may not be corrected fully depending on the installation condition. In such case, adjust it with the [POSITION] menu
→ [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT].
ff [REALTIME KEYSTONE] cannot be set in following cases.
gg When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] → [FLOOR/CEILING] is set to [CEILING]
ENGLISH - 93
gg When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] → [FLOOR/CEILING] is set to [AUTONEGOTIATION], and the
actual installation status is ceiling mount
ff When [REALTIME KEYSTONE] and [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] are both set to [OFF] and [REALTIME KEYSTONE] is changed to [ON],
[SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] is changed to [KEYSTONE].
[SCREEN ADJUSTMENT]
You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.
Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape.
1) Press as to select [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT].

[OFF] Does not perform [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT].
[KEYSTONE] Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
[CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
[CURVED CORRECTION] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
Setting [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION]
2) Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION].

ffThe [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust.
[KEYSTONE]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio.
Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.
For details of the projection distance and the projected image width, refer to “Projected image and throw distance” (x page 38).
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal
direction. direction.
[CURVED CORRECTION]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio.
Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.
For details of the projection distance and the projected image width, refer to “Projected image and throw distance” (x page 38).
94 - ENGLISH
[CURVED CORRECTION]
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL ARC] [HORIZONTAL ARC]
[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
[MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]

Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.
Setting [CORNER CORRECTION]
2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].

ffThe [CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust.

ffThe individual adjustment screen for the selected item is displayed.
6) Press asqw to adjust.
ffPress as to adjust [VERTICAL], and press qw to adjust [HORIZONTAL].
ffFor the adjustment of [VERTICAL], press a to adjust the value in - direction, and press s to adjust the
value in + direction.
[UPPER LEFT]
[UPPER RIGHT]
[LOWER LEFT]
[LOWER RIGHT]
ENGLISH - 95
[HORIZONTAL]
[LINEARITY]
[VERTICAL]
Note
ff Depending on the correction value, the aspect ratio of the image may change.
96 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
[ADVANCED MENU] menu

On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

You can increase the vertical resolution and enhance the picture quality by performing cinema processing when
the PAL (or SECAM) 576i signal, the NTSC 480i signal, and 1080/50i, 1080/60i are input.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].

[AUTO] Automatically detects the signal and performs the cinema processing. (Factory default setting)
[OFF] Does not perform cinema processing.
When 480i or 1080/60i signal
[30p FIXED]
is input
Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).
When 576i or 1080/50i signal
[25p FIXED]
is input
Note
ff In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p
FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.)
[BLANKING]
You can adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out
from the screen while an image from the VCR or other devices are projected.
1) Press as to select [BLANKING].
ffThe [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT].
4) Press qw to adjust the blanking width.
Blanking correction Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

The blanking zone
Press q.
moves upward.
Top of the screen [UPPER]

The blanking zone
Press w.
moves downward.
PT‑MZ770: Top and bottom
0 - 599
The blanking zone PT‑MW730: Top and bottom
Press w. 0 - 399
moves upward.
Bottom of the
[LOWER]
screen The blanking zone
Press q.
moves downward.
The blanking zone

Press w.
moves to the right.
Left side of the
[LEFT]
Press q.
moves to the left.
PT‑MZ770: Left and right
0 - 959
The blanking zone PT‑MW730: Left and right
Press q. 0 - 639
moves to the right.
Right side of the
[RIGHT]
Press w.
moves to the left.
ENGLISH - 97
Chapter 4 Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
Note
ff [BLANKING] cannot be adjusted when the input is MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING.
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
You can adjust the image to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [INPUT RESOLUTION].

ffThe [INPUT RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [TOTAL DOTS], [DISPLAY DOTS], [TOTAL LINES], or [DISPLAY LINES], and press
qw to adjust each item.
ffValues corresponding to the signal being input are displayed automatically for each item. Increase or
decrease the displayed values and adjust to the optimal point while viewing the screen if there are vertical
stripes or sections are missing from the screen.
Note
ff Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur with all white signal input.
ff Image may be disrupted during automatic adjustment, but this is not a malfunction.
ff [INPUT RESOLUTION] can be adjusted only when a RGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
[CLAMP POSITION]
You can adjust the optimal point when the black part of the image is blunt or it has turned green.
1) Press as to select [CLAMP POSITION].
Status Rough guide for optimal value Range of adjustment

The point where bluntness of the black part improves the most is
The black part is blunt.
the optimal value.
1 - 255
The point where the green part becomes black, and the bluntness
The black part is green.
has improved is the optimal value.
Note
ff [CLAMP POSITION] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
[RASTER POSITION]
This will allow the position of the image to move within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not
using the whole display area.
1) Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].

ffThe [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
Note
ff [RASTER POSITION] cannot be adjusted when the input is MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING.
98 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the sub-menu.
Changing the display language

You can select the language of the on-screen display.
1) Press asqw to select the display language and press the <ENTER> button.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Қазақша
SELECT
ENTER SET
ffVarious menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected
language.
ffThe language can be switched to English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Dutch, Swedish,
Finnish, Norwegian, Danish, Polish, Hungarian, Romanian, Czech, Russian, Turkish, Arabic, Kazakh,
Vietnamese, Chinese, Korean, Japanese, and Thai.
Note
ff The on-screen display language is set to English in the factory default setting as well as when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
ENGLISH - 99
Chapter 4 Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
[COLOR ADJUSTMENT]
Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously.
1) Press as to select [COLOR ADJUSTMENT].

[OFF] Does not perform the color adjustment.
[3COLORS] Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] and the white [GAIN].
[7COLORS] Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].
3) Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], or [WHITE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN],
[MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] when [7COLORS] is selected).

ffThe [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN], [3COLORS:BLUE], or [3COLORS:WHITE] screen is
displayed.
When [7COLORS] is selected, the [7COLORS:RED], [7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE],
[7COLORS:CYAN], [7COLORS:MAGENTA], [7COLORS:YELLOW], or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is
displayed.
ffBy setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.
6) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
ffOnly [GAIN] can be adjusted when [WHITE] is selected for [3COLORS].
ffThe adjustment value will change between 0*1 and 2 048.
*1 The lower limit varies depending on the color to be adjusted.
Note
ff Operation when correcting the adjustment color
When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.
When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
ff Since advanced skills are necessary for the adjustment, this adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector
or by a service person.
ff Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors.
ff The selected adjustment item will return to the factory default value when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed.
ff When [COLOR ADJUSTMENT] is set to anything other than [OFF], the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR CORRECTION] is fixed to
[OFF], and the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER].
[COLOR CORRECTION]
Colors can be adjusted and registered for each input signal format.
1) Press as to select [COLOR CORRECTION].

[OFF] Standard setting
For each of the four signal formats of VIDEO, RGB, and YCBCR/YPBPR, six colors of red, green, blue,
[USER] cyan, magenta, and yellow can be adjusted and registered. Press the <ENTER> button and set the
details. Adjustment is possible within the range of -31 to +31.
100 - ENGLISH
[SCREEN SETTING]
Set the screen size.
Correct to the optimum image position for the set screen when the aspect ratio of a projected image is changed.
1) Press as to select [SCREEN SETTING].

ffThe [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] item.
Model No. [SCREEN FORMAT] Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected
[16:10] Cannot be adjusted.
PT‑MZ770 [4:3] Adjusts the horizontal position between ‑160 and 160.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between ‑60 and 60.
[16:10] Cannot be adjusted.
PT‑MW730 [4:3] Adjusts the horizontal position between ‑107 and 107.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between ‑40 and 40.
4) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].

ff[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].
5) Press qw to adjust [SCREEN POSITION].
[AUTO SIGNAL]
Set whether to execute automatic setup of signals automatically.
The screen display position or signal level can be adjusted automatically without pressing the <AUTO SETUP/
CANCEL> button on the remote control on each occasion if you input unregistered signals frequently at meetings,
etc.
1) Press as to select [AUTO SIGNAL].

[OFF] Sets the auto signal function to off.
Executes automatic setup automatically when images are changed to unregistered signals during
[ON]
projection.
[AUTO SETUP]
Set this function when adjusting a special signal for still image signal, or horizontally long (such as 16:9) signal.
Setting with [MODE]
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].

ffThe [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.

[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
Select this item when an image aspect ratio is a wide-screen signal, which does not meet the
[WIDE]
[DEFAULT] setting.
[USER] Select this when receiving a signal with a special horizontal resolution (number of display dots).
ffProceed to Step 7) when [DEFAULT] or [WIDE] is selected.
ENGLISH - 101
ffProceed to Step 5) when [USER] is selected.

5) Press as to select [DISPLAY DOTS], and press qw to match [DISPLAY DOTS] to the horizontal
resolution of the signal source.

ffAutomatic adjustment is executed. [PROGRESS] is displayed while in automatic adjustment. When
completed, the screen returns to the [AUTO SETUP] screen.
Adjusting position automatically
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].

ffThe [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [POSITION ADJUST].
[ON] Adjust the screen position and size when automatic setup is executed.
[OFF] Does not perform automatic adjustment.
Note
ff The automatic setup function may not operate properly unless a still image containing clear blacks and whites is input.
[RGB IN]
Set the <RGB 1 IN> terminal and the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
Switching the slice level of an input synchronization signal
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].

ffThe [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SYNC SLICE LEVEL] for [RGB1] or [RGB2].
[LOW] Set the slice level to [LOW].

[HIGH] Set the slice level to [HIGH].
Setting [EDID MODE] in [RGB IN] (RGB2 input)
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].

ffThe [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press asto select [EDID MODE] for [RGB2].

ffThe [EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
[SCREEN FIT] Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
102 - ENGLISH
ffProceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

ffThe [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x768p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p],
[1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
ffThe [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].
gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
Note
ff The content set in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] is displayed in the [RGB IN] screen.
ff Setting of the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency may be necessary on the computer or video device in use.
ff The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after setting.
ff The output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency may not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use.
[HDMI IN]
Set this item in accordance with the video signal input to the <HDMI 1 IN> terminal or the <HDMI 2 IN> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [HDMI IN]
1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

ffThe [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL] of [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a Blu-
[64-940]
ray disc player) is input to the <HDMI 1 IN> terminal or the <HDMI 2 IN> terminal.
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI‑D terminal of the external device (such as a
computer) is input to the <HDMI 1 IN> terminal or the <HDMI 2 IN> terminal using a conversion cable,
[0-1023] etc.
Select this item also when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of a computer, etc., is input to the
<HDMI 1 IN> terminal or the <HDMI 2 IN> terminal.
Note
ff The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
ff The HDMI signal level is displayed for 30 bits of input.
Setting [EDID SELECT] in [HDMI IN]

(Only for PT-MZ770)
ENGLISH - 103

3) Press as to select [EDID SELECT] of [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K video signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum
[4K/60p]
vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).
[4K/30p]
[2K] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K video signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.
Note
ff Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K video signal is input.
ff Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] or [4K/30p] and the 2K video signal or
lower is input.
ff For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p], [4K/30p], or [2K], refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 220).
Setting [EDID MODE] in [HDMI IN]

3) Press as to select [EDID MODE] of [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

ffThe [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.
[USER] Set the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.

9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
Note
ff Settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in the [HDMI IN] screen.
104 - ENGLISH
[DIGITAL LINK IN]

Set this item in accordance with the video signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].

ffThe [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (Blu-ray disc
[64-940]
player, etc.) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI‑D terminal or HDMI terminal of an external
[0-1023] device (such as a computer) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
Note
ff The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
ff The signal level is displayed for 30 bits of input.
Setting [EDID SELECT] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]

(Only for PT-MZ770)

3) Press as to select [EDID SELECT] of [DIGITAL LINK IN].

[4K/60p]
vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz, and YPBPR 4:2:0 format only).
[4K/30p]
[2K] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K video signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.
Note
ff Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K video signal is input.
ff Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] or [4K/30p] and the 2K video signal or
lower is input.
ff For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p], [4K/30p], or [2K], refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 220).
Setting [EDID MODE] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]

3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].
ENGLISH - 105

ffThe [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.

9) Press qw to switch [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
Note
ff Settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in the [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen.
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
Set the on-screen display.
Setting [OSD POSITION]
Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD POSITION].

[2] Sets to the center left of the screen.
[3] Sets to the bottom left of the screen.
[4] Sets to the top center of the screen.
[5] Sets to the center of the screen.
[6] Sets to the bottom center of the screen.
[7] Sets to the upper right of the screen.
[8] Sets to the center right of the screen.
[9] Sets to the bottom right of the screen.
[1] Sets to the upper left of the screen.
106 - ENGLISH
Setting [OSD SIZE]

(Only for PT‑MZ770)
Set the display size of the menu screen (OSD).

3) Press as to select [OSD SIZE].

[NORMAL] Select this item normally.
Displays the menu screen in the font size double of when set to [NORMAL]. The size of the menu
[DOUBLE]
screen is doubled horizontally and vertically.
Setting [OSD ROTATION]

Set the orientation of the menu screen (OSD).

3) Press as to select [OSD ROTATION].

[OFF] Does not rotate the screen.
[CLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° clockwise.
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° counterclockwise.
Setting [OSD DESIGN]

Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).

3) Press as to select [OSD DESIGN].

[1] Sets the background color to light blue and the selection color to yellow.
[2] Sets the background color to dark blue and the selection color to blue.
[3] Sets the background color to gray and the selection color to white.
[4] Sets the background color to green and the selection color to light green.
[5] Sets the background color to brown and the selection color to pink.
[6] Sets the background color to light brown and the selection color to skin tone.
Setting [OSD MEMORY]

Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.
ENGLISH - 107

3) Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].

[ON] Holds the cursor position.
[OFF] Does not hold the cursor position.
Note
ff Even if [ON] is set, the cursor position is not maintained when the power is turned off.
Setting [INPUT GUIDE]

Set whether to display the input guide in the position set in [OSD POSITION].
Input guide is a screen to display information such as the currently selected input terminal name, signal name,
memory number, etc.

3) Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].

[ON] Displays the input guide.
[OFF] Hides the input guide.
Setting [WARNING MESSAGE]

Set the display/hide of the warning message.

3) Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].

[ON] Displays the warning message.
[OFF] Hides the warning message.
Note
ff When [OFF] is set, a warning message is not displayed on the projected image even if a warning condition such as [TEMPERATURE
WARNING] is detected while using the projector.
The message prompting to clean/replace the filter is also not displayed.
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] (only when NTSC signal is input)

Set closed captions.
Selecting the closed caption display
1) Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING].

ffThe [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] screen is displayed.
108 - ENGLISH
3) Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION].

[OFF] Hides closed captions.
[ON] Displays closed captions.
ffProceed to Step 5) when [ON] is selected.

5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Setting the closed caption mode
1) Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING].

ffThe [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] screen is displayed.
ff[MODE] cannot be selected when [CLOSED CAPTION] is set to [OFF].
[CC1] Displays CC1 data.
Note
ff Closed caption is a function that displays text information of video signals mainly used in North America. Captions may not be displayed
depending on the connected devices or contents being played back.
ff [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] can be selected only when NTSC signal is input.
ff If [CLOSED CAPTION] is set to [ON], brightness of images may change depending on the external devices compatible with closed caption
function to be connected or contents to be used.
ff If a closed caption signal of the selected mode is input, the security message set in the [SECURITY] menu → [DISPLAY SETTING] is not
displayed.
ff Closed captions are not displayed when the menu screen is displayed.
[SIGNAL SEARCH]
Enable/disable the signal search function.
If the signal search function is enabled, the input with input signal is automatically selected and projection is
started when the projector is turned on. Also, when the currently selected input has no signal, the projector will
automatically switch to the input with input signal when the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button is pressed.
1) Press as to select [SIGNAL SEARCH].

[ON] Enables the signal search function.
[OFF] Disables the signal search function.
Note
ff The signal search function does not operate when the input is Panasonic APPLICATION or MIRRORING.
ff If the input is MEMORY VIEWER, this function will determine that there is an input signal when the USB memory is inserted in the
<VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
[BACK COLOR]
Set the display of the projected screen when there is no signal input.
1) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].
ENGLISH - 109

[BLUE] Displays the entire projection area in blue.
[BLACK] Displays the entire projection area in black.
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
Note
ff To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the Panasonic
website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
[STARTUP LOGO]
Set the logo display when the power is turned on.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].

[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[NONE] Disables the startup logo display.
Note
ff When [USER LOGO] is selected, the display of the startup logo will be kept for approximately 15 seconds.
ff If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the startup logo is not displayed when
projection starts before the specified time elapses after the projector enters the standby mode.
The specified time is a time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
[SHUTTER SETTING]
Set the operation of the shutter function.
Setting [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

ffThe [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].
Item Adjustment
[OFF] Does not set fade-in or fade-out.
[FADE-IN] Sets the fade-in or fade-out time.
[FADE-OUT] [0.5s] - [10.0s] Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -
[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
Note
ff If the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control is pressed during fade-in or fade-out, the fade operation is canceled.
ff Fade-in/fade-out is not performed on the audio. Audio is output or paused linked to the operation of the shutter function.
Setting [STARTUP]
Automatically enable/disable the shutter function (shutter: closed/open) when the power is turned on.
110 - ENGLISH

3) Press as to select [STARTUP].
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) when the
[OPEN]
power is turned on.
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) when the
[CLOSE]
power is turned on.
Using the shutter function

Image and audio is turned off when the projector is not used for a specific time.

3) Press as to select [SHUTTER].

ffPress the <MENU> button or the <RETURN> button to clear.
Note
ff To output audio while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed), set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [AUDIO SETTING] → [IN
SHUTTER] to [ON].
[P-TIMER]
Set and operate the presentation timer function.
Setting the mode
1) Press as to select [P-TIMER].

ffThe [P-TIMER] screen is displayed.

[COUNT UP] Displays the elapsed time from when the count is started.
[COUNT DOWN] Displays the remaining time against the time set in [TIMER].
Setting the countdown timer

3) Press as to select [TIMER].
4) Press qw to set the time.

ffThe time can be set from 1 minute to 180 minutes in one-minute interval.
ffThe factory default setting is 10 minutes.
Note
ff [TIMER] can be set when [MODE] is set to [COUNT DOWN].
ENGLISH - 111
Using the presentation timer

3) Press as to select an item, and press the <ENTER> button.
[START] Starts the count.

[STOP] Stops the count.
[RESTART] Restarts the count.
[RESET] Resets the count.
[EXIT] Ends the presentation timer.
ffElapsed time or remaining time is displayed in the bottom right of the projected image when [START] or
[RESTART] is selected.
ffThe elapsed time or remaining time when it was stopped is displayed in the bottom right of the projected
image when [STOP] is selected.
Note
ff The presentation timer can be operated by the <P-TIMER> button on the remote control. (x page 76)
ff The security message set in the [SECURITY] menu → [DISPLAY SETTING] (x page 136) is not displayed while the elapsed time or
remaining time is displaying.
ff The elapsed time or remaining time is not displayed while the menu screen is displayed.
ff When [MODE] is set to [COUNT UP], the start time will be “000:00”.
ff When [MODE] is set to [COUNT DOWN], the start time will be the value set in [TIMER].
ff The timer gauge will turn clockwise when set to [COUNT UP], and turn counterclockwise when set to [COUNT DOWN].
[FREEZE]
The projected image is paused and audio is turned off regardless of the playback of the external device.
1) Press as to select [FREEZE].

ffPress the <MENU> button or the <RETURN> button to clear.
Note
ff [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.
ff Operation of [FREEZE] can also be performed with the <FREEZE> button on the remote control. (x page 73)
[DIGITAL ZOOM]
(When RGB signal for still images, HDMI signal for still images, or DIGITAL LINK signal for still images is input.
Or, when MEMORY VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, or MIRRORING is input.)
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL ZOOM].

ffThe [DIGITAL ZOOM] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the magnification factor.
ffThe magnification factor can be adjusted from 1.0 times to 3.0 times in 0.1 intervals.
ffThe move screen is displayed.
5) Moving the enlargement area
ffFor details, refer to “Using the digital zoom function” (x page 75).
Note
ff The digital zoom is canceled when the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button on the remote control or the <LENS/CANCEL> button on the
control panel is pressed while performing the digital zoom.
ff The adjustment value of the digital zoom is canceled when the type of input signal is changed while performing the digital zoom.
ff The freeze function is disabled while performing the digital zoom.
ff The digital zoom will not operate in some of the still image signals.
112 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

On the menu screen, select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
[PROJECTOR ID]
The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side
to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].

[ALL] Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
[1] - [64] Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.
Note
ff To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.
ff When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer
control.
If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID
numbers.
ff Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” (x page 77) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector.
Change the [FRONT/REAR] setting when the screen display is inverted.
Change the [FLOOR/CEILING] setting when the screen display is upside down.
Setting [FRONT/REAR]
1) Press as to select [FRONT/REAR] of [PROJECTION METHOD].

[FRONT] Select this item when installing the projector in front of the screen.
[REAR] Select this item when installing behind the screen (using translucent screen).
Setting [FLOOR/CEILING]
1) Press as to select [FLOOR/CEILING] of [PROJECTION METHOD].

Automatically detects the attitude of the projector by the built-in angle sensor.
[AUTO]
Set [AUTO] normally.
[FLOOR] Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.
Select this item when installing the projector using the Ceiling Mount Bracket (optional).
[CEILING]
Projected image is inverted upside down.
Note
ff For the range of installation attitude detected by the built-in angle sensor, refer to “Angle sensor” (x page 37).
ENGLISH - 113
[ECO MANAGEMENT]
Set [ECO MANAGEMENT] to reduce the power consumption and enhance the life of the light source.
Setting [LIGHT POWER]
1) Press as to select [ECO MANAGEMENT].

ffThe [ECO MANAGEMENT] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [LIGHT POWER].

Select this item when high luminance is required. The light power is 100 % and the estimated runtime
[NORMAL]
is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but select this item to suppress the reduction in
[ECO] luminance against the runtime of the light source. The light power is 70 % and the estimated runtime
is approximately 24 000 hours*1.
Select this item to prioritize the operation with low noise. The light power is 70 % and the estimated
[QUIET]
runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
[USER] Select the item to set the picture brightness as desired.
*1 The runtime is an estimation when the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [2].
5) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
Adjustment
Operation Range of adjustment
Brightness Runtime (estimate)
Press w. The screen becomes brighter. The runtime becomes shorter.
30 %*1 - 100 %
Press q. The screen becomes darker. The runtime becomes longer.
*1 It should be noted that the picture quality tends to deteriorate as the light output decreases.
Note
ff Under influences of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation environment, etc., the runtime may be shorter than the
estimation.
ff Runtime is a time until the luminance of the light source to become about half when using the projector continuously. The runtime is just an
estimate, and is not the warranty period.
ff If the runtime exceeds 10 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
ff When anything other than [NORMAL] is set, the setting in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LightID] is disabled, and this item is fixed to
[OFF].
Setting [AMBIENT LIGHT DETECTION]

Sets if the [AMBIENT LIGHT DETECTION] function to adjust the light power depending on the brightness of the
installed location is enabled or not.

3) Press as to select [AMBIENT LIGHT DETECTION].

[OFF] Disables the ambient light detection function.
[ON] Enables the ambient light detection function.
114 - ENGLISH
Note
ff The luminance may not be detected correctly when an object is placed on top of the projector, blocking the luminance sensor. In such a
case, it may not operate properly even if [AMBIENT LIGHT DETECTION] is set to [ON].
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LightID] is set to [EXTERNAL CONTROL] or [INTERNAL ID], [AMBIENT LIGHT DETECTION] is
set to [OFF].
Setting [SIGNAL DETECTION]

Set if the [SIGNAL DETECTION] function to reduce the power of the light source during no signal is enabled or
not.

3) Press as to select [SIGNAL DETECTION].

[OFF] Disables the [SIGNAL DETECTION] function.
[ON] Enables the [SIGNAL DETECTION] function.
Note
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LightID] is set to [EXTERNAL CONTROL] or [INTERNAL ID], [SIGNAL DETECTION] is set to
[OFF].
ff The [SIGNAL DETECTION] function will also operate during MEMORY VIEWER, MIRRORING, or Panasonic APPLICATION input. In the
following cases, the projector will determine that there is no input signal.
gg MEMORY VIEWER input: USB memory is not inserted in the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal
gg MIRRORING input, Panasonic APPLICATION input: There is no connection from the computer, etc.
Setting [POWER MANAGEMENT]

This is a function to set the power of the projector to standby state or ready state automatically when there
is no input signal for specific time. Selection of standby state or the ready state, and the time for the power
management function to operate can be set.

3) Press as to select [POWER MANAGEMENT].

The countdown timer is displayed when the signal input is not present for 30 seconds, and the light
[SHUT DOWN]
source is turned off, and goes into standby after cooling when the time set in [TIMER] has elapsed.
[OFF] Disables the power management function.
The countdown timer is displayed when the signal input is not present for 30 seconds, and the
light source is turned off, and goes into ready state after cooling when the time set in [TIMER] has
[READY] elapsed.
The light source will turn on and starts projection when a signal is input or the button is operated while
in ready state.
ffProceed to Step 5) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.

ffThe [POWER MANAGEMENT] screen is displayed.
6) Press qw to set the time for [TIMER].
ffThe setting time will switch each time you press the button.
ffThe time for the power management function to operate can be set from 5 minutes to 120 minutes in five-
minute interval.
ENGLISH - 115
Note
ff The power management function will also operate in MEMORY VIEWER, MIRRORING, and Panasonic APPLICATION inputs. The condition
to determine that there is no input signal is as follows.
gg MEMORY VIEWER input: USB memory is not attached to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal
gg MIRRORING input, Panasonic APPLICATION input: There is no connection from the computer, etc.
Setting [STANDBY MODE]

Set the power consumption during standby and whether to enable the [QUICK STARTUP] function.

3) Press as to select [STANDBY MODE].

[NORMAL] Select this item when using the network function during standby.
[ECO] Select this item to reduce power consumption during standby.
ffProceed to Step 5) when [NORMAL] is selected.

5) Press as to select [QUICK STARTUP].

[OFF] Disables the [QUICK STARTUP] function.
Enables the [QUICK STARTUP] function until the specified time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after
[ON] the projector enters the standby mode. The time until the projection starts after the power is turned on
will be reduced during the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid.
ffProceed to Step 7) when [ON] is selected.

ffThe [QUICK STARTUP] screen is displayed.
8) Press qw to switch [VALID PERIOD].
[30MIN.] Sets the time until the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled after the projector enters the standby
[60MIN.] mode.
[90MIN.] Select a desired valid period.
Note
ff When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL], the network function can be used during standby.
ff When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the network function and the audio output function cannot be used during standby. Also, some
RS‑232C commands cannot be used.
ff When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], it takes longer for the projection to start after the power is turned on, compared to when set to
[NORMAL].
ff [STANDBY MODE] is fixed to [NORMAL] when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON].
ff [QUICK STARTUP] cannot be set when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power consumption during standby becomes high during the period when the [QUICK
STARTUP] function is valid.
ff If [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled when the time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after the
projector enters the standby mode. The startup time and power consumption will be the same as when [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF].
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks in red while in the standby mode during the
period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid. When [IN STANDBY MODE] in [AUDIO SETTING] is set to [OFF], the power indicator
<ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will change to a red light when the specified time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after the projector enters the
standby mode.
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid will be added as the projector runtime.
[LightID]
Set the function to transmit the Light ID signal.
116 - ENGLISH
1) Press as to select [LightID].

[OFF] Disables the Light ID function. The Light ID signal is not transmitted.
Transmits the Light ID signal set by the user.
Select this item when the Light ID signal transmitted by the projector is switched using the contents
list distribution function or the Light ID control function of the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
[EXTERNAL CONTROL] To set the Light ID, it is necessary to purchase the Light ID. To purchase the Light ID, visit the
Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/LinkRay/).
The Light ID which the user has set is erased in following cases.
ff When the <MAIN POWER> switched is set to <OFF>
Transmits the internal Light ID signal.
The Light ID signal is linked to the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/) in the
[INTERNAL ID] factory default setting or after the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] is executed.
When the Light ID is set while [LightID] is set to [INTERNAL ID], the Light ID signal set by the user is
transmitted.
Note
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [LIGHT POWER] is set to anything other than [NORMAL], the
[LightID] setting is disabled and fixed to [OFF].
ff The light output is decreased when [LightID] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When clogging of the filter is detected and the brightness of the light source is restricted, [LightID] will be fixed to [OFF].
ff Following setting will be disabled and it will be fixed to [OFF] when [LightID] is set to anything other than [OFF].
gg The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [AMBIENT LIGHT DETECTION] and [SIGNAL DETECTION]
ff To set the Light ID signal, use “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”. The software can be downloaded from the Panasonic website (https://
panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ff The internal Light ID signal can be rewritten by executing the control command using the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”. For details
of executing the control command, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the [LightID] setting is reset to the factory default.
ff For details of the contents list distribution function and Light ID control function of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, refer to the
Operating Instructions of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
ff The projected image may flicker when the Light ID signal is transmitted, but this is caused luminance change during the transmission of the
Light ID, and it is not a malfunction.
ff When clogging of the filter is detected and the brightness of the light source is restricted, the filter indicator <FILTER> lights up and [LightID]
is set to [OFF], and the Light ID signal will not be transmitted. Set it again after cleaning the clogged filter.
For details on how to solve the filter clogging, refer to “When an indicator lights up” (x page 198).
[INITIAL STARTUP]
Set the startup method when the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON>.
1) Press as to select [INITIAL STARTUP].

[LAST MEMORY] Starts up the projector in the condition before the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <OFF>.
[STANDBY] Starts up the projector in standby.
[ON] Starts projecting immediately.
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].

ffThe [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the input, and press the <ENTER> button.
[LAST USED] Keeps the input selected last.

[RGB1] Sets the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Sets the input to RGB2.
[VIDEO] Sets the input to VIDEO.
ENGLISH - 117
[HDMI1] Sets the input to HDMI1.

[HDMI2] Sets the input to HDMI2.
[DIGITAL LINK] Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[MEMORY VIEWER] Sets the input to MEMORY VIEWER.
[Panasonic APPLICATION] Sets the input to Panasonic APPLICATION.
[MIRRORING]*1 Sets the input to MIRRORING.
Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the Panasonic twisted-pair-cable
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]*2
transmitter to the specified input.
*1 [MIRRORING] is displayed when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300) is attached.
*2 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.
[DATE AND TIME]

Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.
Setting the time zone
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].

ffThe [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [TIME ZONE].
4) Press qw to switch [TIME ZONE].
Setting the date and time manually

3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].

ffThe [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select an item, and press qw to set the local date and time.
6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe setting of the date and time will be completed.
Setting the date and time automatically

3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].

ffThe [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press qw to change the setting to [ON].

ffThe setting of the date and time will be completed.
Note
ff To set the date and time automatically, the projector must be connected to the network.
ff If synchronization with the NTP server fails just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON], [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to
[OFF]. If [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].
118 - ENGLISH
ff Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server. Refer to “[Adjust clock] page” (x page 170) for details.
ff The [TIME ZONE] setting is reset to the factory default when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA]
is executed. However, the date and time based on the local date and time setting (Coordinated Universal Time, UTC, Universal Time,
Coordinated) will be maintained without being initialized.
[SCHEDULE]
Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.
Enabling/disabling the schedule function
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].

[OFF] Disables the schedule function.
Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” (x page 119) or “How to set a
[ON]
program” (x page 119) for how to set the schedule.
Note
ff The [STANDBY MODE] setting will be forced to [NORMAL] when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY
MODE] is set to [ECO], and [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON]. Changing the setting to [ECO] is not available. The [STANDBY MODE] setting will
not change back even when [SCHEDULE] is set to [OFF] in this condition.
How to assign a program
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Select and assign a program to each day of week.
ffPress as to select the day of week, and press qw to select a program number.
ffYou can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “‑ ‑ ‑” indicates that the program number has not been set.
How to set a program

Set up to 16 commands to each program.
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PROGRAM EDIT].
4) Press qw to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press as to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button.

ffYou can change the page using qw.
6) Press as to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
7) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time, and then press the <ENTER> button.
8) Press as to select [COMMAND].

ffThe [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.
10) Press as to select a [COMMAND].
ffFor [COMMAND] which requires detailed settings, the items of the detailed settings will switch each time
you press qw.
ENGLISH - 119
ffWhen [INPUT] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press asqw to select the input to be
set.
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND] Description
[COMMAND]
[POWER ON] ― Switches on the projector.
[STANDBY] ― Enters standby.
Enables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO
[ON]
MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP].
[QUICK STARTUP]
Disables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO
[OFF]
MANAGEMENT] → [QUICK STARTUP].
[OPEN] Disables the shutter function (shutter: open).
[SHUTTER]
[CLOSE] Enables the shutter function (shutter: closed).
[RGB1] Switches the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Switches the input to RGB2.
[VIDEO] Switches the input to VIDEO.
[HDMI1] Switches the input to HDMI1.
[HDMI2] Switches the input to HDMI2.
[INPUT] [DIGITAL LINK] Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[MEMORY VIEWER] Switches the input to MEMORY VIEWER.
[Panasonic APPLICATION] Switches the input to Panasonic APPLICATION.
[MIRRORING]*1 Switches the input to MIRRORING.
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]*2
Panasonic twisted-pair-cable transmitter to the specified input.
[NORMAL] Prioritizes luminance.
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source although
[ECO]
the luminance is lower than that of [NORMAL].
[LIGHT POWER]
Prioritizes the operation with less noise although the luminance is
[QUIET]
lower than that of [NORMAL].
[USER] Controls the power according to settings in [USER].
[OFF] Stops the audio output during standby.
[IN STANDBY MODE(AUDIO)]
[ON] Outputs the audio during standby.
[VOLUME] [0] - [63] Sets the volume.
*1 [MIRRORING] is displayed when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300) is attached.
*2 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.

ffThe command is fixed and n is displayed at the left of the selected command.
ffAfter the command is fixed, press the <MENU> button to close the detailed setting screen.
12) Press asqw to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff To delete a command that has been already set, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the screen in Step 5) is
displayed, or select [DELETE] at the screen in Step 6) and press the <ENTER> button.
ff If multiple commands have been set for the same time, they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command
number.
ff The operating time will be the local time. (x page 118)
ff If an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in
[SCHEDULE] is executed, the command set with the schedule function may not be executed.
[RS-232C]
Set the communication condition of the <SERIAL IN> terminal. Refer to “<SERIAL IN> terminal” (x page 215).
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].

ffThe [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INPUT SELECT].
120 - ENGLISH
[PROJECTOR] Performs the RS‑232C communication with the <SERIAL IN> terminal of the projector.
Performs the RS‑232C communication via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model
[DIGITAL LINK]
No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) and the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
5) Press as to select [BAUDRATE].

[9600]
[19200] Select the proper speed.
[38400]
7) Press as to select [PARITY].

[NONE]
[EVEN] Select the parity condition.
[ODD]
Note
ff When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication using that serial terminal is available only when the corresponding device
(such as the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G)) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal.
ff When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G), setting for “NO
SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.
ff When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication speed for input is fixed to 9 600 bps and the parity is fixed to “NONE”.
Using the control command for the existing projector

Set this function when using the control command for previously purchased Panasonic projector to control this
projector with a computer using the <SERIAL IN> terminal on the projector. The existing Panasonic projector
control software, etc., can continually be used.
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].

ffThe [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [EMULATE].

ffThe [EMULATE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select an item.
[OFF] Does not use existing control command for the projector.
[D3500] D3500 series
[D4000] D4000 series
[D/W5k SERIES] D5700 series, DW5100 series, D5600 series, DW5000 series, D5500 series
DZ870 series, DW830 series, DX100 series, DZ780 series, DW750 series, DX820 series, DZ770
series, DW740 series, DX810 series, DZ680 series, DW640 series, DX610 series, DW730 series,
DX800 series, DZ6710 series, DZ6700 series, DW6300 series, D6000 series, D5000 series, DZ570
[D/W/Z6k SERIES]
series, DW530 series, DX500 series, RZ970 series, RW930 series, RX110 series, RZ770 series,
RZ660 series, RW730 series, RW620 series, RZ670 series, RW630 series, RZ575 series, RZ570
series
[L730 SERIES] L730 series, L720 series, L520 series
[L780 SERIES] L780 series, L750 series
[L735 SERIES] L735 series
[L785 SERIES] L785 series
[F/W SERIES] FW430 series, FX400 series, FW300 series, F300 series, F200 series, FW100 series, F100 series
[LZ370] LZ370 series
ENGLISH - 121
LB3 series, LB2 series, LB1 series, ST10 series, LB90 series, LW80NT series, LB80 series, LB78
[LB/W SERIES]
series, LB75 series
VW435N series, VW440 series, VW430 series, VX505N series, VX510 series, VX500 series, VW330
[VX500 SERIES]
series, VX400NT series, VX400 series, VX41 series
[EZ570 SERIES] EZ570 series, EW630 series, EW530 series, EX600 series, EX500 series
[VW431D] VW431D series

[REMOTE1 MODE]
Set the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal.
1) Press as to select [REMOTE1 MODE].

[DEFAULT] Uses pin assignment of the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal in standard setting.
[USER] Use this item when changing the setting of the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal. (x page 219)
[F/W SERIES] Uses the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal setting compatible with the F/W series.

4) Press as to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press qw to switch the setting.
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
Set the function of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.
1) Press as to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].

ffThe [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a function.
[DISABLE] Disables the <FUNCTION> button.

[SUB MEMORY] Displays the sub memory list. (x page 135)
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting. (x page 89)
[DAYLIGHT VIEW] Switches the [DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting. (x page 88)
[LENS CALIBRATION]
Detect the lens shift limit value of the projector, and automatically set the home position.
1) Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].

ffTo cancel, select [CANCEL].
ffThe lens moves up, down, left, and right to detect the lens shift limit value, and automatically set the home
position.
ffThe lens stops to complete the lens calibration.
Note
ff [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu during lens calibration. The operation cannot be canceled during calibration.
122 - ENGLISH
ff [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when the lens calibration was not executed correctly.
ff Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for three seconds or longer will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration
execution.
[AUDIO SETTING]
Set audio functions in detail.
Adjusting the volume
1) Press as to select [AUDIO SETTING].

ffThe [AUDIO SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [VOLUME].

Press w. Increases the volume.
0 - 63
Press q. Decreases the volume.
Adjusting the left to right audio balance

3) Press as to select [BALANCE].

Press w. Increases the volume on the right.
L16 - R16
Press q. Increases the volume on the left.
Setting the audio output of the built-in speaker

3) Press as to select [BUILT-IN SP].

[ON] Outputs the audio from the built-in speaker.
[OFF] Does not output the audio from the built-in speaker.
Note
ff When [BUILT-IN SP] is set to [ON], audio is output from the built-in speaker even when a cable is connected to the <VARIABLE AUDIO
OUT> terminal. To not output audio from the built-in speaker and output the audio from the external audio device connected to the
<VARIABLE AUDIO OUT> terminal, set [BUILT-IN SP] to [OFF].
Setting audio output in the standby mode

ENGLISH - 123
3) Press as to select [IN STANDBY MODE].

[OFF] Audio is not output during standby.
[ON] Audio is output during standby.
Note
ff Audio is not output in the standby mode when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY MODE] is set to
[ECO].
Setting audio output while using the shutter function

3) Press as to select [IN SHUTTER].

[OFF] Audio is not output while using the shutter function (shutter: closed).
[ON] Audio is output while using the shutter function (shutter: closed).
Setting mute mode

3) Press as to select [MUTE].

[OFF] Audio is output.
[ON] Audio is not output.
Setting audio input from a connected device

3) Press as to select item to set in [AUDIO IN SELECT].
[RGB1] Sets the audio to output when RGB1 is input.

[RGB2] Sets the audio to output when RGB2 is input.
[VIDEO] Sets the audio to output when VIDEO is input.
[HDMI1] Sets the audio to output when HDMI1 is input.
[HDMI2] Sets the audio to output when HDMI2 is input.
[DIGITAL LINK] Sets the audio to output when DIGITAL LINK is input.
Sets the audio to output when MEMORY VIEWER, MIRRORING, or Panasonic APPLICATION is
[NETWORK/USB]
input.

124 - ENGLISH
Audio connected to the <AUDIO IN 1> terminal is output during projection of image from the set input
[AUDIO IN 1]
terminal.
[AUDIO IN 2]
terminal.
[AUDIO IN 3]
terminal.
[HDMI1 AUDIO IN]*1 Audio input to HDMI1 is output.
[HDMI2 AUDIO IN]*2 Audio input to HDMI2 is output.
[DIGITAL LINK AUDIO IN]*3 Audio input to DIGITAL LINK is output.
[NETWORK/USB AUDIO IN]*4 Outputs the audio of MEMORY VIEWER, MIRRORING, or Panasonic APPLICATION.
*1 Only when the input signal is HDMI1

*2 Only when the input signal is HDMI2
*3 Only when the input signal is DIGITAL LINK
*4 Only when the input signal is MEMORY VIEWER, MIRRORING, or Panasonic APPLICATION
[FILTER COUNTER]
Check the runtime of the filter and set the cleaning/replacement cycle of the filter. Also, the runtime of the filter can
be reset.
1) Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER].

ffThe [FILTER COUNTER] screen is displayed.
[FILTER COUNTER] Displays the runtime of the filter.
[TIMER] Sets the cleaning/replacement cycle of the filter.
[FILTER COUNTER RESET] Resets the runtime of the filter.
Setting [TIMER]
If the filter is to be cleaned/replaced periodically, set the cycle in hours. Once the runtime of the filter reaches
the set time, a message prompting to clean/replace the filter [FILTER COUNTER has reached the set time.] is
displayed on the projected image.

3) Press as to select [TIMER].

[OFF] Select this item when a message is not to be displayed.
Select this item when a message is to be displayed. The cleaning/replacement cycle of the filter can
[1000 H] - [20000 H]
be set in 1 000 hour intervals.
Resetting [FILTER COUNTER]

Reset the runtime of the filter.

3) Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER RESET].
5) The confirmation screen is displayed, so pressqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffDisplay of [FILTER COUNTER] will change to [0 H].
ENGLISH - 125
[DC OUT]
Set the power supply function of the <DC OUT> terminal.
1) Press as to select [DC OUT].
2) Press qw to select an item.
Enables the power supply function. Power is supplied to the external device connected to the <DC
[ON]
OUT> terminal.
Disables the power supply function. The power is not supplied even if an external device is connected
[OFF]
to the <DC OUT> terminal.
Note
ff When [DC OUT] is set to [ON], the power is supplied even in the standby state or ready state in the following cases.
gg When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL], and [QUICK STARTUP] is
set to [ON], and then the projector goes into the standby state by pressing the power <v/b> button
gg When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [POWER MANAGEMENT] is set to [READY], and no signal is
detected and the projector goes into the ready state
ff When an external device exceeding the rating (DC 5 V, maximum 2 A) is connected to the <DC OUT> terminal while this function is set to
[ON], an error is detected and the power supply will be stopped. At this time, [ERROR] is displayed in [DC OUT]. Disconnect the external
drive and turn on the projector again when [ERROR] is displayed.
[STATUS]
Display the status of the projector.
1) Press as to select [STATUS].

ffThe [STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the pages.
ffThe page will change each time you press the button.
[PROJECTOR TYPE] Displays the projector type and serial number of the projector.
[SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the projector.
[PROJECTOR RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the projector.
[LIGHT RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the light source.
Displays the elapsed time from when the light source is illuminated.
[CONTINUOUS LIGHTING The elapsed time after the illumination of the light source can be confirmed when adjusting the focus.
TIME] The elapsed time is reset when the light source is temporarily turned off such as using the shutter
function.
[MAIN/SUB VERSION] Displays the main and sub versions of the firmware of the projector.
[NETWORK VERSION] Displays the network version of the firmware of the projector.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]*1 Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]*1 Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the projector.
[LIGHT TEMP. 1]*1 Displays the temperature status for the front block of the light source (on the lens side).
[LIGHT TEMP. 2]*1 Displays the temperature status for the rear block of the light source (on the air exhaust port side).
[SELF TEST] Displays the status of the projector.
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal currently selected.
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
[MEMORY NO.] Displays the memory number of the input signal.
[ON COUNT] [POWER ON TIMES] Displays the number of times the power is turned on.
[NUMBER OF REGISTERED
Displays the number of registered signals.
SIGNAL]
[COOLING CONDITION] Displays the set cooling conditions.
[ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE] Displays the atmospheric pressure.
[REMOTE1 STATUS] Displays the control status of the REMOTE1.
[EMULATE] Displays the setting in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [RS-232C] → [EMULATE].
126 - ENGLISH
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal used for the projected image.
[SIGNAL FORMAT] Displays the format of the input signal.
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY] Displays the frequency of the input signal.
[SYNC.STATE] Displays the sync polarity of the input signal.
[V.SYNC WIDTH] Displays the vertical sync signal pulse width of the input signal.
[SCAN TYPE] Displays the scan type of the input signal.
[SIGNAL INFORMATION]
[TOTAL DOTS] Displays the total dot count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY DOTS] Displays the number of input signal display dots.
[TOTAL LINES] Displays the total line count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY LINES] Displays the number of input signal display lines.
[SAMPLING] Displays the sampling information of the input signal.
[SIGNAL LEVEL] Displays the signal level of the input signal.
*1 The temperature status is indicated with text color (green/yellow/red) and bar scale. Use the projector within the range that the indication is
green.
Note
ff E-mail containing the status can be sent to the E-mail address (up to two addresses) set in “[E-mail set up] page” (x page 171) by
pressing the <ENTER> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed.
ff There may be items that are displayed and items that are not displayed in [SIGNAL INFORMATION] depending on the setting or the input
signal.
ff If any abnormality has occurred on the projector, press the <DEFAULT> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed to display the detail
screen of the error information.
ff For details on the contents displayed in [SELF TEST], refer to “[SELF TEST] display” (x page 208).
[DATA CLONING]
Operate the data cloning function. The setting and adjustment values of one projector can be copied to multiple
projectors via LAN or using the USB memory.
rrData that cannot be copied

Following settings can not be copied. Set these in each projector.
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID]
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [ADJUST CLOCK]
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [LAN] → [WRITE PROTECT]
ffThe [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD]
ffThe [SECURITY] menu → [MENU LOCK]
ffThe [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRED LAN]
ffThe [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN]
ffThe [NETWORK/USB] menu → [PROJECTOR NAME]
ffSecurity password
ffMenu lock password
ffOperation setting password
ffPassword set in “[Change password] page” (x page 175) of the web control screen
ff“[E-mail set up] page” (x page 171) in the web control screen
ff“[Authentication set up] page” (x page 172) in the web control screen
ff“[Crestron Connected(TM)] page” (x page 176) in the web control screen
rrSupported device
ffCommercially available USB memory is supported.
The USB memory with a security function is not supported.
ffOnly the cards formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 can be used.
ffOnly the single partition structure is supported.
Note
ff The data cloning function will not operate when the models of the projectors are different. For example, data of PT-MZ770 can be copied to
other PT-MZ770 projectors, but it can not be copied to PT-MW730. Data cloning is limited to the same model.
Copying the data to other projector via LAN

Make the following settings on the projector as the data copy destination in advance. For details, refer to "Setting
[WRITE PROTECT]". (x page 128)
ENGLISH - 127
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [LAN] → [WRITE PROTECT] → [OFF]
1) Connect all projectors to the hub using LAN cables. (x page 155)
2) Turn on all the projectors.
3) On the copy source projector, press as to select [DATA CLONING].

ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
5) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
6) Press as to select [LAN].

ffThe [LAN DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
8) Press as to select [SELECT PROJECTOR].

ffThe projector in the same subnet is displayed as a list.
10) Press as to select the copy destination projector.

ffTo select multiple projectors, repeat Steps 10) to 11).
ffCopy of the data between the projectors is started.
Once the copy is completed, the cloning result is displayed as a list in the [LAN DATA CLONING] screen.
Meanings of the marks displayed in the list are as follows.
ggGreen: Data copy has succeeded.
ggRed: Data copy has failed. Confirm the connection of the LAN cable and power status of the copy
destination projector.
ffAfter displaying the LAN data cloning request message, the destination projector automatically shifts to the
standby state and performs the copy of the data.
14) Turn on the power of the copy destination projector.
ffThe copied content is reflected on the copy destination projector.
Note
ff The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
Initial password as the factory default: awsqawsq
ff While data is being copied, the light source indicator <LIGHT>, the temperature indicator <TEMP>, and the filter indicator <FILTER> of the
destination projector will blink. Make sure that the indicators stop blinking before powering on the projector.
Setting [WRITE PROTECT]

Set if the copy of data via LAN is permitted or not.
1) On the copy destination projector, press as to select [DATA CLONING].

4) Press as to select [LAN].
128 - ENGLISH

ffThe [LAN DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
6) Press as to select [WRITE PROTECT].

[OFF] Operation of [DATA CLONING] from other projector via LAN is allowed.
Operation of [DATA CLONING] from other projector via LAN is disabled.
[ON] ff Copy will not be possible when set to [ON]. When it is not necessary to copy, set to [ON] so the
data is not changed by mistake.
Note
Copying the data to other projector using USB
Copying projector data to USB memory
1) Insert the USB memory into the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
2) Press as to select [DATA CLONING].

5) Press as to select [USB MEMORY].

ffThe [SELECT COPY TYPE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [PROJECTOR -> USB MEMORY].

ffCopying of data to the USB memory is started.
Once the copying of data is completed, [Data copy finished.] is displayed.
10) Once the copying of the data is completed, disconnect the USB memory from the <VIEWER/PAIRING>
terminal.
Note
ff Depending on the shape of the USB memory, it may not be able to connect to the surrounding parts. In such case, copy the data via LAN.
For details of copying the data via LAN, refer to “Copying the data to other projector via LAN” (x page 127).
ff An error message is displayed when saving or reading data to/from the USB memory has failed.
Copying data in the USB memory to the projector

Switch the input to something other than MEMORY VIEWER in advance.
1) Insert the USB memory into the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
2) Press as to select [DATA CLONING].

ENGLISH - 129

5) Press as to select [USB MEMORY].

ffThe [SELECT COPY TYPE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [USB MEMORY -> PROJECTOR].

ffThe projector automatically enters standby state and starts copying data from the USB memory to the
projector.
10) Once the copying of the data is completed, disconnect the USB memory from the <VIEWER/PAIRING>
terminal.
11) Turn on the power of the copy destination projector.

ffThe copied content is reflected on the projector.
Note
ff While data is being copied, the light source indicator <LIGHT>, the temperature indicator <TEMP>, and the filter indicator <FILTER> of the
destination projector will blink. Make sure that the indicators stop blinking before powering on the projector.
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]

Save the various setting values as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA].

ff[PROGRESS] is displayed while saving data.
Note
ff Data set from the computer application is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]

Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA].

Note
ff The projector enters the standby mode to reflect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER DATA] is executed.
ff Data registered from a computer is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
130 - ENGLISH
[INITIALIZE]
Return various setting values to their factory default settings.
1) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].

ffThe [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select an item to initialize.
Returns all setting values including [REGISTERED SIGNAL], [NETWORK/E-MAIL], and [LOGO
[ALL USER DATA] IMAGE] to the factory default settings.
The projector enters the standby mode to reflect the setting values.
Deletes all the setting values saved for each input signal.
[REGISTERED SIGNAL] To delete only a part of a registered signal, perform the procedure described in “Deleting the
registered signal” (x page 133).
[NETWORK/E-MAIL] Returns the various setting values in the [NETWORK/USB] menu to the factory default values.
[LOGO IMAGE] Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].
Note
ff The following settings are not initialized even if [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY MODE]
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
This function is used by a service person.
ENGLISH - 131
Chapter 4 Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu
[TEST PATTERN] menu

On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.
[TEST PATTERN]
Display the test pattern built-in to the projector.
Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input
signal before performing various adjustments.
1) Press qw to switch the [TEST PATTERN] item.

Menu screen + Color bar
(vertical)
Menu screen + Color bar
(horizontal)
Menu screen + 16 tones
(vertical 1)
(vertical 2)
Menu screen + 16 tones Displays a test pattern with the menu screen. Select a desired test pattern.
(horizontal 1)
(horizontal 2)
Menu screen + Focus
Menu screen + 16:9/4:3
aspect frame
Menu screen + All white
Menu screen + All black
Displays the menu screen and input signal.
Menu screen + Input screen
Internal test patterns are not displayed.
Note
ff Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed to hide the menu screen.
132 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
[SIGNAL LIST] menu

On the menu screen, select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.
rrRegistered signal details

Memory number: A1 (1-2)
Sub memory number

When the address number (A1, A2, ... L7, L8) signal is registered
ffA name can be set for each sub memory (x page 135).
Registering new signals

After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed, the
registration is completed and the [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
Note
ff Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.
ff There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers, and the signal is
registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.
ff The name to be registered is automatically determined by the input signal.
ff If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.
Renaming the registered signal

Registered signals can be renamed.
1) Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.

ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
ffThe memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed.
ffPress the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].

ffThe [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns.
ffWhen pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name
will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used.
Deleting the registered signal

Registered signals can be deleted.
1) Press asqw to select the signal to delete.

ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
ffTo cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
ffThe selected signal will be deleted.
ENGLISH - 133
Note
ff A registered signal can also be deleted from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.
Protecting the registered signal
1) Press asqw to select the signal to protect.

4) Press as to select [LOCK].

[OFF] The signal is not protected.
[ON] The signal is protected.
ffA lock icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK] is set to
[ON].
A1: 720/60p-A1 RGB2
A2: XXXXXX-A2 XXXX
A3: XGA75-A3 RGB2
Note
ff When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal deletion, image adjustment, and automatic setup are not available. To perform these operations, set
[LOCK] to [OFF].
ff A signal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected.
ff Even a protected signal will be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed.
Expanding signal lock-in range
1) Press asqw to select the signal to set.

4) Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].

[NARROW] Select this item usually.
[WIDE] Widens the lock-in range.
ffAn expansion icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK-IN
RANGE] is set to [WIDE].
A1: 720/60p-A1 RGB2
A2: XXXXXX-A2 XXXX
A3: XGA75-A3 RGB2
Note
ff Switch the range where the signal to be input is determined to be the same signal as the already registered signal.
ff To prioritize the determination that a signal is the same as the already registered signal, set this function to [WIDE].
ff Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.
ff This function can be used only when a signal is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal, the <RGB 2 IN> terminal, <HDMI 1 IN> terminal, the
<HDMI 2 IN> terminal, or the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
ff When [WIDE] is set, the image may be distorted because a signal is recognized as the same even if its synchronizing frequency varies
slightly.
ff When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority.
Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.
134 - ENGLISH
ff When a registration signal is deleted, the settings are also deleted.

ff In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal, signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the
setting is set to [WIDE].
Sub memory
The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is
recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.
Use this function when you need to switch the aspect or adjust the picture quality such as the white balance
while using the same signal source. The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal,
such as the image aspect ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] menu (items such as [CONTRAST] and
[BRIGHTNESS]).
Registering to the sub memory
1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press as.

ffThe sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step 3).
ffA list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
ffThe <FUNCTION> button on the remote control can be used instead of as when [SUB MEMORY] is
selected from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].

ffThe [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
ffTo rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps 6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal”
(x page 133).
Switching to the sub memory

ffA list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].

ffThis switches to the signal selected in Step 2).
Deleting the sub memory

ffThe [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory to be deleted, and press the <DEFAULT> button on the
remote control.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
ffTo cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.
ffThe selected sub memory will be deleted.
ENGLISH - 135
Chapter 4 Settings — [SECURITY] menu
[SECURITY] menu
On the menu screen, select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
ffWhen the projector is used for the first time
Initial password: Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.
Attention
ff When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a password is prompted. Enter the preset password and
then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.
ff When the password has been changed previously, enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
ff An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
Display the [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen when the power is turned on with the <MAIN POWER> switch set
to the <OFF> side. When the entered password is incorrect, the operation will be restricted to the power <v/b>
button.
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].

[OFF] Disables the security password entry.
[ON] Enables the security password entry.
Note
ff This item is set to [OFF] in the factory default setting or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is
executed. Set it to [ON] as necessary.
ff Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
ff The security password is enabled after setting the item to [ON] and setting the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]

Change the security password.
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw and the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set the password.
ffUp to eight button operations can be set.
5) Re-enter the password for the confirmation.
Note
ff The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
ff When numerical values are used for the security password, the security password is required to be initialized if the remote control is lost.
Consult your dealer for the method of initialization.
[DISPLAY SETTING]
Overlap the security message (text or image) over the projecting image.
1) Press as to select [DISPLAY SETTING].
136 - ENGLISH

[OFF] Hides the security message.
[TEXT] Displays the text set in the [SECURITY] menu → [TEXT CHANGE].
Note
[TEXT CHANGE]
Edit the text to be displayed when [TEXT] is selected in [DISPLAY SETTING].
1) Press as to select [TEXT CHANGE].

ffThe [TEXT CHANGE] screen is displayed.

ffThe text is changed.
[MENU LOCK]
Press the <MENU> button to display the menu, and set if menu operation is enabled or not.
1) Press as to select [MENU LOCK].

[OFF] Enables the menu operation.
[ON] Disables the menu operation.
Note
ff This function is set to [OFF] as the factory default setting or after the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] is executed. Set it to
[ON] as necessary.
ff When [MENU LOCK] is set to [ON], the [MENU LOCK PASSWORD] screen is displayed by pressing the <MENU> button. Menu operation
is enabled by entering the set menu lock password. In this case, enabling of the menu operation is maintained until the projector goes into
the standby mode.
[MENU LOCK PASSWORD]

Change the menu lock password.
1) Press as to select [MENU LOCK PASSWORD].

ffThe [MENU LOCK PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the character, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the character.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
Attention
ff The initial password is AAAA as the factory default or after the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] is executed.
ff Change the password periodically and make it hard to guess.
ENGLISH - 137
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]

Enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
[CONTROL PANEL] Sets the limitation on the control from the control panel.
[REMOTE CONTROL] Sets the limitation on the control from the remote control.

ffThe [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.

ffYou can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control.
[ENABLE] Enables all button operations.
[DISABLE] Disables all button operations.
Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.
[USER]
Refer to “Enabling/disabling any button” (x page 138) for details.

Enabling/disabling any button
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.

ffThe [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.
6) Press qw to switch [USER].
7) Press as to select the button item to set.

ffWhen [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in [REMOTE CONTROL], press the <ENTER> button, and
then press as to select the button to set.
Buttons that can be set
[CONTROL PANEL] [REMOTE CONTROL]
[POWER BUTTON] Power <v/b>button
<RGB1/2> button, <VIDEO> button, <HDMI
[INPUT SELECT BUTTON] <INPUT SELECT> button 1> button, <HDMI 2> button, <DIGITAL LINK>
button, <NETWORK/USB> button
[MENU BUTTON] <MENU> button
[LENS BUTTON] <LENS> button Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
[AUTO SETUP BUTTON] ― <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button
[SHUTTER BUTTON] <SHUTTER> button
[ON SCREEN BUTTON] ― <ON SCREEN> button
[OTHER BUTTON] asqw, <ENTER> button Buttons not listed above
138 - ENGLISH
[ENABLE] Enables button operations.

[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
ffThe following items can be selected only when [RGB1/2 BUTTON] is selected in [INPUT SELECT
BUTTON].
[TOGGLE] Switches between [RGB1] and [RGB2] when the button is operated.
[RGB1] Fixes to [RGB1].
[RGB2] Fixes to [RGB2].
ffThe following items can be selected only when [NETWORK/USB BUTTON] is selected in [INPUT SELECT
BUTTON].
Switches the items in following order when the button is operated.
[TOGGLE]
[MEMORY VIEWER] → [Panasonic APPLICATION] → [MIRRORING]
[MEMORY VIEWER] Fixes to [MEMORY VIEWER].
[Panasonic APPLICATION] Fixes to [Panasonic APPLICATION].
[MIRRORING] Fixes to [MIRRORING].
ffWhen [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7), pressing the <MENU> button returns to the
[CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen once the item is switched.
Note
ff When a button operation is performed on the the control panel or remote control where [DISABLE] is set, the [CONTROL DEVICE
PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
Enter the control device password.
ff The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen will disappear when there is no operation for approx. 10 seconds.
ff When the setting has completed, the menu screen will disappear. To operate continuously, press the <MENU> button to display the main
menu.
ff Even when you set button operations on the remote control disabled, operations of the <ID SET> and <ID ALL> buttons on the remote
control are kept enabled.
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

The control device password can be changed.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].

ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.

Attention
ff The initial password is “AAAA” as the factory default or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is
executed.
ff Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
ENGLISH - 139
Chapter 4 Settings — [NETWORK/USB] menu
[NETWORK/USB] menu
On the menu screen, select [NETWORK/USB] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
ffTo use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module
(Model No.: ET‑WM300).
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]

Switch the communication method of the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK MODE].

[AUTO] Switches the communication method automatically to DIGITAL LINK, long reach, or Ethernet.
[DIGITAL LINK] Fixes the communication method to DIGITAL LINK.
[LONG REACH] Fixes the communication method to long reach.
[ETHERNET] Fixes the communication method to Ethernet.
Possible communication modes

l: Communication possible
―: Communication not possible
Communication possible
Setting Video transfer Video transfer
Ethernet RS‑232C
(100 m (328'1")) (150 m (492'2"))
For DIGITAL LINK l ― l l
[AUTO] For long reach ― l l l
For Ethernet ― ― l*1 ―
[DIGITAL LINK] l ― l l
[LONG REACH] ― l l l
[ETHERNET] ― ― l*1 ―
*1 Communication via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not available. Connect the projector to the network directly.
Note
resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance
will be 50 m (164'1").
ff The maximum transmission distance when connected with the long-reach communication method is 150 m (492'2"). In this case, the signal
that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).
ff When the communication method of the twisted-pair-cable transmitter is set to long reach, the projector will connect with long-reach
communication method when [DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [AUTO]. To connect with the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.:
ET‑YFB200G) with the long-reach communication method, set [DIGITAL LINK MODE] to [LONG REACH].
ff Connection will not be made correctly if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not supporting the long-reach communication method even if
[DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [LONG REACH].
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]

Display the DIGITAL LINK connection environment.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS].

ffThe [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[LINK STATUS] One of [NO LINK], [DIGITAL LINK], [LONG REACH], or [ETHERNET] is displayed.
[HDCP STATUS] One of [NO SIGNAL], [OFF], or [ON] is displayed.
140 - ENGLISH
[SIGNAL QUALITY] is a numerical value of the amount of error, and the display color changes to
green, yellow, or red depending on that value.
Check the signal quality level while receiving a signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
[SIGNAL QUALITY] ff [MAX]/[MIN]: Maximum/minimum value of the amount of error
ff Green (-12 dB or lower) → normal signal quality level.
ff Yellow (-11 to -8 dB) → caution level that noise may appear on the screen.
ff Red (-7 dB or more) → abnormal level that synchronization is disrupted or not possible to receive.
[DIGITAL LINK MENU]

When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected
to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal, the main menu of the connected DIGITAL LINK output supported device is
displayed. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device for details.
Note
ff When the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [EXTRON XTP] is set to [ON], [DIGITAL LINK MENU] cannot be selected.
[WIRED LAN]
Perform the connection setting to use the wired LAN.
1) Press as to select [WIRED LAN].

ffThe [WIRED DETAILED SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select an item, and change the setting according to the operation instruction of the
menu.
Select this item when there is a DHCP server in the network

[ON] the projector is to be connected, and to acquire the IP address
[DHCP] automatically.
Select this item when there is no DHCP server in the network the
[OFF]
projector is to be connected, and to specify the IP address.
[IP ADDRESS] Enter the IP address when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[SUBNET MASK] Enter the subnet mask when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Enter the default gateway address when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[DNS1] Enter the address of the preferred DNS server when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[DNS2] Enter the address of the alternate DNS server when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
Select the EAP set for the RADIUS server. If the EAP is not set, set to [NONE].
The types of EAP that can be selected are as follows.
[EAP]
[PEAP(MS-CHAPv2)], [PEAP(GTC)], [EAP-TTLS(MD5)], [EAP-TTLS(MS-CHAPv2)], [EAP-FAST(MS-
CHAPv2)], [EAP-FAST(GTC)], [EAP-TLS]
Enter the user name to be used for authentication in single-byte alphanumeric characters (excluding
[USER NAME] the space). (Maximum of 64 characters)
This can be set when [EAP] is set to anything other than [NONE].
Enter the password to be used for authentication in single-byte alphanumeric characters. (Maximum
[PASSWORD] of 64 characters)
This can be set when [EAP] is set to anything other than [NONE].
4) Once the setting change is completed, press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffWhen [INVALID ENTRY. PLEASE RE-ENTER.] is displayed, change the setting to correct content.
Note
ff For setting content of each item, consult the network administrator.
ff When using EAP, the projector is required to be set according to the RADIUS server setting. For the RADIUS server setting, confirm with the
network administrator.
ff Wired LAN and wireless LAN cannot be used in the same segment.
ff When using the projector by setting [DHCP] to [ON], confirm that the DHCP server is operating.
rrFactory default setting

ffFollowing is preset as the factory default setting.
ENGLISH - 141
[DHCP] [OFF]
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.10.100
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] 192.168.10.1
[DNS1]/[DNS2] (Blank)
[EAP] [NONE]
[WIRELESS LAN]
Set the connection method of wireless LAN and its details.
1) Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].

Various devices (computer, tablet, smartphone, etc.) equipped with various OS such as Windows,
Mac OS, iOS, or Android can be directly connected to the projector.
[SIMPLE] Also, it is possible to connect with the projector using Panasonic image transfer application software
“Wireless Manager ME6.4”, “Plug and Share”, or “Wireless Projector”.
For details on setting procedure, refer to “Setting [SIMPLE]” (x page 142).
This is the mode to use the projector as a simple access point, and allows the device such as
computer to directly connect to the projector in the infrastructure mode even if there is no separate
access point. Use the Panasonic image transfer application software “Wireless Manager ME6.4”,
[M-DIRECT] “Plug and Share”, or “Wireless Projector” to connect. It can connect in easier manner when using the
iPad/iPhone/iPod touch and Android devices.
Also, detailed network setting can be performed in accordance with the network environment in use.
For details on setting procedure, refer to “Setting [M-DIRECT]” (x page 143).
Detailed network settings can be configured according to the network environment in use. For details
[USER]
on setting procedure, refer to “Setting [USER]” (x page 144).
[DISABLE] Select this item when the wireless LAN is not to be used.
Attention
ff This device is restricted to indoor use when operated in the 2.412 to 2.472 GHz band, in the 5.18 to 5.825 GHz frequency range (Channels
36 to 165).
ff Using the projector outside the country
Note that depending on countries or regions there are restrictions on the channels and frequencies at which you can use the wireless LAN.
Note
ff When [SIMPLE] or [M-DIRECT] is set, maximum number of devices that can be connected to the projector via the wireless LAN
simultaneously is 10 devices.
ff Even if [SIMPLE] or [M-DIRECT] is set, the setting is disabled while MIRRORING input is selected.
ff For how to use the image transfer application software “Wireless Manager ME6.4” compatible to the Windows computer or Mac, refer to the
Operating Instructions of “Wireless Manager ME6.4”. The software can be downloaded from the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/
cns/projector/).
USB memory.
ff For details of the image transfer application software “Wireless Projector” compatible with the iPad/iPhone/iPod touch or Android device,
refer to the following URL.
Setting [SIMPLE]
2) Press qw to select [SIMPLE].
142 - ENGLISH

ffThe [WIRELESS DETAILED SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press asqw to select [KEY].

ffThe [KEY] screen is displayed.
ffThe character string that can be registered as the key is as follows.
gg8 to 15 alphanumeric characters
7) Once the entry of key is completed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
8) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note
ff The factory default setting for [KEY] is set to the same character string as the network ID “Projxxxx” (xxxx is 4-digit number). The network
ID is a fixed value assigned to each product. The network ID can be confirmed in the standby screen projected when switched to Panasonic
APPLICATION input.
Setting [M-DIRECT]
2) Press qw to select [M-DIRECT].

menu.
[IP ADDRESS] Enter the IP address.

[SUBNET MASK] Enter the subnet mask.
[SSID] Set SSID to be used.
[CHANNEL] Select the channel to be used.
Set the key to be used.
[KEY]
Enter 8 to 63 characters of ASCII character, or 64-digit hexadecimal number.
5) Once the setting change is completed, press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff By leaving the [KEY] setting as the factory default value, it is possible for the malicious third party to intercept the radio wave, and content of
the communication may be eavesdropped. Be sure to change it from the factory default value.
ff Do not use in ANY connection with SSID set to “any” or “ANY” character string. ANY connection is a method to connect to a wireless LAN
device with best reception that was detected in the range where the radio wave reaches the wireless LAN compatible device.
ff Depending on the device, key may be represented as “password for SSID”.
ff The authentication method is fixed to WPA2-PSK and the encryption method is fixed to AES.
ff When [M-DIRECT] is set, the projector will function as a DHCP server. Set the device to connect to the projector via LAN to automatically
acquire the IP address.

[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.12.100
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
ENGLISH - 143
M-DIRECTxxxx
(xxxx is the last four digits of the network ID. The network ID is a fixed value assigned to each product. The
[SSID]
network ID can be confirmed in the standby screen projected when switched to Panasonic APPLICATION
input.)
[CHANNEL] 1
[KEY] M-DIRECTxxxx (the same character string as [SSID])
Setting [USER]

ffThe [WIRELESS LAN] screen is displayed and the search result of SSID is displayed. Maximum number of
SSID that can be detected at once is 50 (maximum of 5 pages).
ffCurrently selected SSID is always displayed at the top, and n mark is displayed at the left.
ffA key icon is displayed for the encrypted SSID.
ffThe antenna level of each SSID is indicated with the number of r. More the number indicates higher the
antenna level.
ffTo search the SSID again, press the <DEFAULT> button.
4) Press as to select the SSID to connect from the search result, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffTo set the SSID without selecting from the search result, select [OTHER].
ffThe [WIRELESS DETAILED SETUP] screen (1/2) is displayed.
menu.
Enter the same string as the SSID registered to the access point.
[SSID] This item can be set when the SSID with the n mark at the top was selected in Step 4), or when
[OTHER] was selected.
Select the user authentication method used in the network to which the projector is connected.
Select this item when the authentication method for the access
[OPEN]
point is Open System.
[SHARED]
point is Shared Key.
[WPA-PSK]
point is WPA-PSK.
[AUTHENTICATION] Select this item when the authentication method for the access
[WPA2-PSK]
point is WPA2-PSK.
Select this item when the authentication method of the access point
[WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP]
is WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP.
[WPA-EAP]
point is WPA-EAP.
[WPA2-EAP]
point is WPA2-EAP.
Select the encryption method used for the communication between the projector and the network.
Select this item not to use encryption.
[NONE] This item can be selected only when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to
[OPEN] or [SHARED].
Select this item when the encryption method is WEP.
[WEP] This item can be selected when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to
[ENCRYPTION] [OPEN] or [SHARED].
Select this item when the encryption method is TKIP.
[TKIP] This item can be selected when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to
[WPA-PSK], [WPA2-PSK], [WPA-EAP], or [WPA2-EAP].
Select this item when AES is used as the encryption method.
[AES] This item can be selected when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to
[WPA-PSK], [WPA2-PSK], [WPA-EAP], or [WPA2-EAP].
Set one of numbers from [1] to [4] as the default key.
[DEFAULT KEY] This item can be set when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to [OPEN] or [SHARED], and [ENCRYPTION]
is set to [WEP].
144 - ENGLISH
Set WEP key to the key number selected in [DEFAULT KEY].

This item can be selected only when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to [OPEN] or [SHARED], and the
encryption method is [WEP].
[KEY1] - [KEY4]
Only the 64 bits or 128 bits WEP key can be set. For 64 bits, enter five characters in alphanumeric
(10 digits in case of hexadecimal), and for 128 bits, enter 13 characters in alphanumeric (26 digits in
case of hexadecimal).
Set the key.
[KEY] This item can be set when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK].
Enter 8 to 63 characters of ASCII character, or 64-digit hexadecimal number.
Select the EAP set for the RADIUS server.
This item can be set when [AUTHENTICATION] is set to [WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP], [WPA-EAP], or
[WPA2-EAP].
[EAP]
The types of EAP that can be selected are as follows.
[PEAP(MS-CHAPv2)], [PEAP(GTC)], [EAP-TTLS(MD5)], [EAP-TTLS(MS-CHAPv2)], [EAP-FAST(MS-
CHAPv2)], [EAP-FAST(GTC)], [EAP-TLS]
Enter the user name to be used for authentication in single-byte alphanumeric characters (excluding
the space). (Maximum of 64 characters)
[USER NAME]
[WPA2-EAP].
Enter the password to be used for authentication in single-byte alphanumeric characters. (Maximum
of 64 characters)
[PASSWORD]
[WPA2-EAP].
6) Press as to move to next page.

ffThe [WIRELESS DETAILED SETUP] screen (2/2) is displayed.
menu.
Select this item when there is no DHCP server in the network

[OFF] to which the projector is to be connected, and to specify the IP
address.
[DHCP]
Select this item when there is a DHCP server in the network to
[ON] which the projector is to be connected, and to acquire the IP
address automatically.
[IP ADDRESS] Enter the IP address when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[SUBNET MASK] Enter the subnet mask when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Enter the default gateway address when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[DNS1] Enter the address of the preferred DNS server when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
[DNS2] Enter the address of the alternate DNS server when [DHCP] is set to [OFF].
8) Once the setting is completed, press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffWhen [INVALID ENTRY. PLEASE RE-ENTER.] is displayed, change the setting to correct content.
Note
ff When using EAP, the projector is required to be set according to the RADIUS server setting. For setting the server, consult the network
administrator.
ff When using the EAP combined with an access point with the SSID broadcast disabled, select [WPA-EAP] or [WPA2-EAP] as the
authentication method even if the authentication of the access point is WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP.
ff Wired LAN and wireless LAN cannot be used in the same segment.
ff When using the projector by setting [DHCP] to [ON], confirm that the DHCP server is operating.
ff If the LAN connection is not established via access point even when “Setting of the projector” (x page 157) is executed, consult the
manufacturer of the used access point (radio wave repeater).

[AUTHENTICATION] [OPEN]
[ENCRYPTION] [NONE]
[DHCP] [OFF]
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.11.100
ENGLISH - 145
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0

[PROJECTOR NAME]
Name of the projector can be changed. Enter if a host name is required when using the DHCP server, etc.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR NAME].

ffThe [PROJECTOR NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
4) Once the entry of the projector name is completed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the
<ENTER> button.
Note
ff The factory default of the projector name is “Namexxxx”. xxxx is the last four digits of the network ID. The network ID is a fixed value
assigned to each product. The network ID can be confirmed in the standby screen projected when switched to Panasonic APPLICATION
input.
[NETWORK CONTROL]
Set up the control method of the network.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].

ffThe [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.
[WEB CONTROL] Set to [ON] to control with the web browser.

[PJLink CONTROL] Set to [ON] to control with the PJLink protocol.
Set to [ON] to use the PJLink notification function.
ff The [PJLink NOTIFICATION] screen is displayed when set to [ON] and the <ENTER> button is
[PJLink NOTIFICATION]
pressed. Set the IP address of the computer to notify the status of the projector in [NOTIFIED IP
ADDRESS 1], [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 2].
Set to [ON] to control with the control command format (x page 217) for the <SERIAL IN> terminal.
[COMMAND CONTROL]
Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 212).
[COMMAND PORT] Set the port number used for command control.
[Crestron Connected(TM)] Set to [ON] to control with Crestron Connected of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
Set to [ON] to control with the controller of AMX Corporation.
Setting this function to [ON] enables detection through “AMX Device Discovery”. For details, visit the
[AMX D.D.]
website of AMX Corporation.
URL http://www.amx.com/
Set to [ON] when connecting the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN>
terminal.
The [EXTRON XTP] setting must be set to [OFF] when connecting the optional DIGITAL LINK output
[EXTRON XTP]
supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G).
For details of the “XTP transmitter”, visit the website of Extron Electronics.
URL http://www.extron.com/
4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

[MEMORY VIEWER]
Set the operation of the Memory Viewer.
1) Press as to select [MEMORY VIEWER].
146 - ENGLISH

ffThe [MEMORY VIEWER] screen is displayed.
Sets the display view of the Memory Viewer screen.
[VIEW] [THUMBNAIL] Displays the files in thumbnail view.
[LIST] Displays the files in list view.
Sets the display order of files in the Memory Viewer screen.
[NAME] Displays the files in the ascending order by the file name.
[SORT] [TYPE] Displays the files by the types of files.
Displays the files in order from the file whose update time is the
[TIME]
oldest.
Enables/disables automatic playback.
[OFF] Select this item to disable automatic playback.
[AUTOPLAY] [ON] Select this item to enable automatic playback.
Select this item to perform automatic playback following the
[SCENARIO]
scenario file registered from “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
Sets display duration of the still image that is being automatically played back.
[INTERVAL] Sets the display duration of still image.
[5S] - [120S]
Select an item from [5S], [10S], [15S], [30S], [60S], and [120S].
Sets special effects used when changing the playback screen of still image content.
[OFF] Does not apply special effects.
[RANDOM] Applies special effects randomly.
[WIPE LEFT] Displays the image gradually from the left like wiping.
[WIPE RIGHT] Displays the image gradually from the right like wiping.
[WIPE DOWN] Displays the image gradually from the top like wiping.
Displays the image gradually from the center toward the left and
[SPLIT]
right like wiping.
[EFFECT] Displays the image gradually from the center towards the entire
[ZOOM OUT]
image.
[FADE] Displays the entire image gradually.
[BLIND] Displays the image gradually like opening vertical blind.
Displays the image gradually from the left to right in checkerboard
[CHECKER WIPE]
patterns.
[SLIDE IN] Displays the next screen as if it slides in from the right to left.
Displays the next screen by removing the current screen as if it
[SLIDE OUT]
slides out from the right to left.
Shows/hides the operation guide on the playback screen and the time bar that visually represents the
playback progress of a movie.
Select this item to display the operation guide and the time bar (only
[GUIDE] [ON]
for movie playback) while playing back the still image/movie.
Select this item not to display the operation guide and the time bar
[OFF]
while playing back the still image/movie.
Note
ff For how to use the Memory Viewer, refer to “Projecting with MEMORY VIEWER input” (x page 186).
ff When [AUTOPLAY] is set to [OFF] or [SCENARIO], [INTERVAL] cannot be set.
ff Even if the setting for [INTERVAL] or [EFFECT] is changed while a still image or movie is being played back in the Memory Viewer, it is
not reflected to the projected image being played back. Return to the Memory Viewer screen in the thumbnail view or list view and restart
playback.
ff Even if [GUIDE] is set to [ON], the operation guide and the time bar will automatically erased approximately three seconds after playback is
started.
ff Even if [GUIDE] is set to [OFF], the operation guide and the time bar is displayed during the fast-forward or rewind.
ff Even if the operation guide is not displayed, operation of the Memory Viewer by asqw, the <ENTER> button, or the <AUTO SETUP/
CANCEL> button during the playback is enabled.
ff The contents list that can be selected in [SCENARIO] of [AUTOPLAY] uses the “Delivering contents list” function of the “Multi Monitoring &
Control Software”.
ff When [AUTOPLAY] is set to [SCENARIO], the playback order and the playback time follow the scenario file registered using the “Multi
Monitoring & Control Software”.
ff When [AUTOPLAY] is set to [SCENARIO], the Light ID set with the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is transmitted.
ENGLISH - 147
[Panasonic APPLICATION]
Set the operation when a device such as computer is to be connected via LAN using the Panasonic application
software.
Setting [MODERATOR MODE]

Set if [MODERATOR MODE] is enabled or not, which allows the moderator can specify the presenter when
multiple devices are connected to the projector using the Panasonic image transfer application software.
1) Press as to select [Panasonic APPLICATION].

ffThe [Panasonic APPLICATION] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODERATOR MODE].

Disables [MODERATOR MODE].
[OFF]
Select this item when the user of each device is to operate to display full screen or not.
Enables [MODERATOR MODE].
[ON] Select this item when the moderator is to operate the projector and specifies the image to display in
full screen from the images of multiple devices displayed in thumbnail.
Note
ff When [ON] is set, cut-in of image by other user is not possible.
ff For how to operate the moderator mode in the Panasonic APPLICATION input, refer to “Projecting with Panasonic APPLICATION input”
(x page 179).
ff The image transfer application software used for Panasonic APPLICATION input are as follows.
gg Wireless Manager ME6.4
gg Plug and Share
gg Wireless Projector for iOS, Wireless Projector for Android
USB memory.
ff For details regarding “Wireless Projector”, refer to the following URL.
Setting [CUT IN]

Set if the cut-in of image by other user or cut-in of image by the simultaneous image distribution function of
“Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is allowed or not while projecting an image of the device screen using the
Panasonic image transfer application software.

3) Press as to select [CUT IN].

[ON] Select this item when allowing the cut-in of an image.
[OFF] Select this item when prohibiting the cut-in of an image.
Note
ff When [MODERATOR MODE] is set to [ON], [CUT IN] cannot be set.
ff When both “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” and “Wireless Manager ME6.4” are running on a single computer, the simultaneous
image distribution function of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” may not operate properly. If it is necessary to run these two applications
simultaneously, prepare a computer for each of the application.
148 - ENGLISH
Setting [PASSWORD]
It is possible to ask the input of password against the device when trying to connect to the projector using the
Panasonic image transfer application software. By requiring the input of password, it is possible to prevent image
cut-in caused by erroneous external connection.

3) Press as to select [PASSWORD].

[OFF] Select this item when not requiring input of password at the time of connection.
[ON] Select this item when requiring input of password at the time of connection.
Note
ff This function is set to [OFF] as the factory default setting or after the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [INITIALIZE] is executed. When connecting
to the projector using the image transfer application software, it is recommended to register a password in the [NETWORK/USB] menu →
[Panasonic APPLICATION] → [PASSWORD CHANGE], and set [PASSWORD] to [ON].
ff When [ON] is set, receiving of distributed image by the simultaneous image distribution function or erasing of image by the distributed image
erasing function of the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is not possible. To use these functions, set [OFF].
Setting [PASSWORD CHANGE]

Register or change the password to enter when connecting to the projector using the Panasonic image transfer
application software.

3) Press as to select [PASSWORD CHANGE].

ffThe [PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
ffMaximum of 8 ASCII characters can be entered.
ffEntered password is registered.
Note
ff As the factory default or after the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [INITIALIZE] is executed, the password is blank. Even if [PASSWORD] is set
to [ON], it will be possible to connect without entering the character if the password is not registered. Make sure to register a password when
setting [PASSWORD] to [ON].
ff Change the password periodically and make it hard to guess.
Setting [PAIRING GUIDE]

Set if the pairing function to display the guide for writing the pairing data on the standby screen when USB
memory is connected to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal while the Panasonic APPLICATION input is selected is
enabled or not. The pairing data is a connection information between the image transfer application software “Plug
and Share”, and the projector and the USB memory.

3) Press as to select [PAIRING GUIDE].
ENGLISH - 149

Enables the pairing function.
[ON] Detects the USB memory connected to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal, and displays the guide to
execute the pairing in the standby screen.
Disables the pairing function.
[OFF]
Does not detect even if USB memory is connected to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
Note
ff The [PAIRING GUIDE] setting is enabled when the Panasonic APPLICATION input is selected.
ff For the method of pairing the projector and the USB memory, refer to “Using the pairing function” (x page 195).
ff For the handling of the USB memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” (x page 70).
USB memory.
[MIRRORING]
Set the operation when connecting a device to the projector using the mirroring function.
ffTo use the mirroring function, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300).
Setting the connection

Set the connection by the mirroring function.
1) Press as to select [MIRRORING].

ffThe [MIRRORING] screen is displayed.
Select the connection method when performing the connection with the mirroring function to the
projector for the first time.
[AUTO] Select this item when connecting automatically.
[CONNECTION TYPE]
Select this item to display a PIN (eight-digit number) in the
[PIN] MIRRORING input standby screen, and connect by entering that
PIN in the device side.
[CHANNEL] Select the channel to be used.
Select this item when the connectivity is bad. Set [OFF] normally.
[MOBILE CONNECTION] [OFF] Disables the function.
[ON] Enables the function.
Note
ff When [CONNECTION TYPE] is set to [AUTO] and the projector cannot be connected depending on the device in use, use the projector by
setting to [PIN].
ff When connecting with a device that has previously connected to the projector with the mirroring function, it will connect automatically
regardless of the [CONNECTION TYPE] setting.
Setting [MODERATOR MODE]

Set if [MODERATOR MODE], which allows the moderator to specify the presenter when multiple devices are in
the condition to connect with the projector with mirroring, is enabled or not.

3) Press as to select [MODERATOR MODE].
150 - ENGLISH

Disables the moderator mode.
[OFF]
Number of device that can connect to the projector and display the image is restricted to one.
Enables the moderator mode.
[ON] Select this item when the moderator is to operate the projector and specify the device to display the
screen image from the multiple devices displayed in the standby screen.
Note
ff When [ON] is set, cut-in of connection by other user is not possible.
ff For how to operate the moderator mode in the MIRRORING input, refer to “Projecting with MIRRORING input” (x page 182).
Setting [CUT IN]

Sets if the cut-in of connection by other user when the projector is displaying the screen of the device for specific
user is allowed or not.

3) Press as to select [CUT IN].

Select this item when allowing the cut-in.
[ON] Clears the connection with the current device, switches the connection to the device with new
connection request, and displays that image.
Select this item when prohibiting the cut-in.
[OFF]
Maintains the connection with the current device.
Note
ff When [MODERATOR MODE] is set to [ON], [CUT IN] cannot be set.
[NETWORK STATUS]
Display the status of the projector network.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].

ffThe [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the display screen.
ffThe page will change each time you press the button.
[WIRED LAN] (page 1/3), [WIRELESS LAN] (page 2/3), [WIRELESS LAN] (page 3/3)
Displays the network information of the wired LAN set on the projector.
[DHCP] Displays the status of use of DHCP server.
[IP ADDRESS] Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[SUBNET MASK] Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
[WIRED LAN] [DEFAULT GATEWAY] Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[DNS1] Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.
[DNS2] Displays the address of the alternate DNS server.
[MAC ADDRESS] Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wired LAN.
[EAP] Displays the type of EAP.
ENGLISH - 151
Displays the network information of the wireless LAN set on the projector.
[ANTENNA LEVEL] Displays the signal status of wireless LAN.
[NETWORK] Displays the connection method of wireless LAN.
[SSID] Displays the string of SSID.
[AUTHENTICATION] Displays the user authentication method.
[EAP] Displays the type of EAP.
[ENCRYPTION] Displays the encryption method.
[WIRELESS LAN] [DEFAULT KEY] Displays the [DEFAULT KEY] setting.
[DHCP] Displays the status of use of DHCP server.
[IP ADDRESS] Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[SUBNET MASK] Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[DNS1] Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.
[DNS2] Displays the address of the alternate DNS server.
[MAC ADDRESS] Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wireless LAN.
Note
ff When [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [DISABLE], the [WIRELESS LAN] page in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed.
152 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5 Operations
This chapter describes how to use each function.
ENGLISH - 153
Chapter 5 Operations — Network connection
Network connection
The projector is equipped with the network function, and following is possible by connecting to a computer.
ffWeb control
Setting, adjustment, and displaying status of the projector are possible by accessing the projector from a
computer.
Refer to “Web control function” (x page 159) for details.
ffSmart Projector Control
This application software sets and adjusts the projector connected via LAN using a smartphone or a tablet.
For details or downloading application software, visit the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/
projector/).
ffMulti Monitoring & Control Software
“Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, a software application to monitor and control multiple display devices
(projector or flat panel display) connected to intranet, can be used.
Plug-in software “Early Warning Software”, which monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals
within an intranet, and notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality,
can also be used.
For details, visit the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ffImage transfer application software
Using the Panasonic image transfer application software, the image sent from a device can be displayed as a
projected image.
For details, refer to “Projecting with Panasonic APPLICATION input” (x page 179).
For how to use the image transfer application software “Wireless Manager ME6.4” compatible to the Windows
computer or Mac, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Wireless Manager ME6.4”.
For how to use the image transfer application software “Plug and Share” allowing to easily connect via the
wireless LAN by pairing the commercially available USB memory with the projector, refer to the Operating
Instruction of “Plug and Share”. For the method of pairing the projector and the USB memory, refer to “Using the
pairing function” (x page 195). By pairing, the connection information between the image transfer application
software “Plug and Share”, and the projector and the USB memory is written into the USB memory.
The application software and Operating Instructions for “Wireless Manager ME6.4” and “Plug and Share” can be
used by downloading from the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
For details of the image transfer application software “Wireless Projector” compatible with the iPad/iPhone/iPod
touch or Android device, refer to the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ffMirroring
By using the mirroring function, the screen of the device connected via wireless LAN can be displayed as a
projected image.
For details, refer to “Projecting with MIRRORING input” (x page 182).
ffPJLink
Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the PJLink protocol.
Refer to “PJLink protocol” (x page 211) for details.
ffCommand control
Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the control command.
Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 212) for details.
154 - ENGLISH
Connecting via wired LAN

This projector can receive the Ethernet signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter together with the video,
audio, and serial control signal via a LAN cable.
Example of a normal network connection
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)
Hub
Attention
Note
ff A LAN cable is required to use the network function via wired LAN.
ff Connect a LAN cable to send and receive the Ethernet signal to the <LAN> terminal or the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector.
ff Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher. Either the straight or the crossover cable, or both cables
can be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The projector will determine the type of the cable
(straight or crossover) automatically.
ff Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.
Example of network connections via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)
Hub
Twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Attention
Note
ff For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
gg Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
gg Shielded type (including connectors)
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
ENGLISH - 155
resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission
distance will be 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach
communication method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency
148.5 MHz) for the long-reach communication method. If this distance is exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in
LAN communication.
ff When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
ff Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
ff Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
ff To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
ff Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
ff When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
ff After laying the cable, confirm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] is displayed
in green, which indicates a normal quality.
ff For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the Panasonic
website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/). Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set
by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of
other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
Setting the projector
1) Connect the projector to a computer using a LAN cable.
2) Turn on the power of the projector.
3) From the main menu, select the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRED LAN], and press the <ENTER>
button.
4) Perform the [WIRED LAN] setting.

ffFor details, refer to [WIRED LAN] (x page 141).
Note
ff To connect to an existing network, perform after consulting your network administrator.

[DHCP] [OFF]
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.10.100
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
[EAP] [NONE]
Operating the computer
1) Turn on the power of the computer.
2) Perform the network setting following the instruction of your network administrator.
ffOperation from the computer is possible by configuring the network setting of the computer as follows if the
projector is in the factory default setting.
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.10.101
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
156 - ENGLISH
Connecting with the wireless LAN

No.: ET‑WM300).
Connecting example
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n
Connecting example for image transfer
MIRRORING Image transfer application software

(Example) Displaying the contents (Example) Displaying on multiple screens
Projector
Projector
Illustration of
connection
Miracast
Miracast compatible device Device such as computer that has installed the Panasonic
image transfer application software
Input MIRRORING Panasonic APPLICATION
Communication IEEE802.11n IEEE802.11a/b/g/n
method
Connection ― Panasonic exclusive method + connection by user
method
Image H.264 Panasonic exclusive method
transmission
method
Setting of the projector
1) Turn on the projector.
2) From the main menu, select the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN], and set to anything
other than [DISABLE].

ENGLISH - 157
4) Setting the connection

ffFor details, refer to [WIRELESS LAN] (x page 142).
Note
ff Wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be used in the same segment.
ff If multiple devices are to be connected, set IP addresses that do not overlap.
ff Do not use in ANY connection with SSID set to “any” or “ANY” character string.
ff The connection setting in the [WIRELESS DETAILED SETUP] screen is not necessary when the Miracast compatible device and the
projector are connected with the mirroring connection. For details regarding the connection using the mirroring function, refer to “Projecting
with MIRRORING input” (x page 182).

Projxxxx
[SIMPLE] [KEY] (Same character string as the network ID is set. xxxx is a four-digit
number.)
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.12.100
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
M-DIRECTxxxx
[M-DIRECT] [SSID]
(xxxx is the last four digits of the network ID.)
[CHANNEL] 1
[KEY] The same character string as SSID
[SSID] Panasonic Projector
[AUTHENTICATION] [OPEN]
[ENCRYPTION] [NONE]
[DHCP] [OFF]
[USER]
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.11.100
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
Operating the computer
1) Turn on the computer.
2) Perform the network setting in accordance with the instruction of the network administrator.
ffWhen the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [M-DIRECT], set the network setting in the
computer to “acquire IP address automatically”.
ffWhen the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [USER], set the network items of the
computer and the projector in accordance with the instruction of the network administrator.
3) Connect the computer to the network set for the projector.
ffIn case of the Windows computer, click in the task tray (bottom right of the computer screen), and select
following SSID as the connection destination.
ggWhen the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [M-DIRECT]: The SSID that is set to the
projector
ggWhen the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [USER]: The SSID of the access point in
use
In case of Mac, click in the menu bar (top right of the computer screen), and select the SSID set for the
projector as the connection destination.
Note
ff If you use wireless LAN connection utility that is standard for your OS, follow the operation procedure of the utility you use to connect to the
network.
158 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5 Operations — Web control function
Web control function

Following operation is possible from a computer using the web control function.
ffSetting and adjustment of the projector
ffDisplay of the projector status
ffSending E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector
The projector supports “Crestron Connected”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
can be used.
ffRoomView Express
ffCrestron Fusion
ffRoomView Server Edition
Note
ff Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Confirm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.
ff “Crestron Connected” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems
connected to a network using a computer.
ff For details of the “Crestron Connected”, visit the website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only.)
URL https://www.crestron.com/
Download “RoomView Express” from the Crestron Electronics, Inc. website. (English only.)
URL https://www.crestron.com/en-US/resources/get-roomview
Computer that can be used for setting

To use the web control function, a web browser is required. Confirm that the web browser can be used in
advance.
OS Compatible browser
Windows Internet Explorer 11.0, Microsoft Edge
Mac OS Safari 8.0/9.0/10.0/11.0
iOS Safari (equipped with version iOS 9, iOS 10 and iOS 11)
Android Google Chrome (equipped with version Android 4.4/5.0/5.1/6.0/7.0/8.0)
Accessing from the web browser
1) Start up the web browser on the computer.
2) Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.
3) Enter the user name and the password.

ffThe factory default settings are User name: dispuser (user rights)/dispadmin (administer rights); Password:
@Panasonic.
ffChange of password is prompted when using the web control function for the first time. Proceed to Step 4).
If the web control function was used previously, proceed to Step 7).
4) Click OK.
ffThe [Change password] page is displayed.
ENGLISH - 159
For user rights For administrator rights
5) Enter the new user name and password, and click [Change].
ffThe screen in Step 3) is displayed again.
6) Enter the new user name and password.
ffEnter the new user name and password set in Step 5).
7) Click OK.
Attention
ff The entry screen for the user name and password may be hidden by other window that is already opened. In such case, minimize the
window in front to display the entry screen.
Note
ff To control with the web browser, set the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [WEB CONTROL] to [ON].
ff Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple
computers.
ff Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.
ff Some items on the projector setting page use the Javascript function of the web browser. Correct control may not be possible when the web
browser is set not to use this function.
ff If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.
ff While updating the screen for the web control, the screen may appear white for a moment, but it is not a malfunction.
ff When the projector is already registered in application software (such as “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” or “Smart Projector Control”)
which uses the communication control via LAN, communication with the projector will become impossible if a user name or password for
[Administrator] is changed. If a user name or password for [Administrator] is changed, update the registration information of the application
software in use.
ff Screenshot of a computer
The size or the display of the screen may be different from this manual depending on the OS or the Web browser, or the type of computer in
use.
Rights for each account

The administrator rights allow use of all functions. There is a limitation in the rights that can be used with the user
rights. Select the rights depending on the purpose.
The function that has l in the administrator rights/user rights column indicates that it can be operated with that
rights.
Item Function Administrator rights User rights Page
[Projector status] l l 162
Error information page l l 163
[Projector status] [Network status] l l 163
[Access error log] l ― 164
[Mail error log] l ― 164
[Basic control] l l 164
[Projector control]
[Detail control] l ― 165
[Network config] l ― 166
[Adjust clock] l ― 170
[Ping test] l ― 170
[Detailed set up]
[E-mail set up] l ― 171
[Authentication set up] l ― 172
[ECO management set up] l ― 172
160 - ENGLISH
Item Function Administrator rights User rights Page

User name of [Administrator] l ― 175
User name of [User] l ― 176
User name of [Moderator] l ― 176
[Change password] Password of [Administrator] l ― 175
176,
Password of [User] l l
176
Password of [Moderator] l ― 176
Operation page l ― 177
[Tools] l ― 177
[Crestron Connected(TM)]
[Info] l ― 178
[Help] l ― 178
Descriptions of items
2
3
4
5
6
1 Page tab 4 [Detailed set up]

Switches pages by clicking this item. The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking this item.
2 [Status] 5 [Change password]
The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item. The [Change password] page is displayed by clicking this item.
3 [Projector control] 6 [Crestron Connected(TM)]
The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking this item. The operation page of Crestron Connected is displayed by
clicking this item.
ENGLISH - 161
[Projector status] page

Click [Status] → [Projector status].
Display the status of the projector for the following items.
1 8
2 9
3 10
11
4 12
5
6 13
7 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1 [PROJECTOR TYPE] 11 [LIGHT OUTPUT]

Displays the type of the projector. Displays the setting status of [LIGHT OUTPUT].
2 [PROJECTOR NAME] 12 [REMOTE1 STATUS]
Displays the projector name set for the projector. Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal.
3 [MAIN VERSION] 13 [INPUT]
Displays the main version of the firmware of the projector. Displays the status of the selected input.
4 [POWER] 14 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the power. Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.
5 [SHUTTER] 15 [EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the shutter function ([ON]: Enabled Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the
(closed), [OFF]: Disabled (open)). projector.
6 [LIGHT POWER] 16 [LIGHT TEMPERATURE1]
Displays the setting status of [LIGHT POWER]. Displays the temperature status of light source 1.
7 [PICTURE MODE] 17 [LIGHT TEMPERATURE2]
Displays the setting status of [PICTURE MODE]. Displays the temperature status of light source 2.
8 [SERIAL NUMBER] 18 [LIGHT]
Displays the serial number of the projector. Displays the lighting status and runtime of the light source.
9 [NETWORK VERSION] 19 [SELF TEST]
Displays the network version of the firmware of the projector. Displays the self-diagnosis information.
10 [VOLUME] 20 [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
Display the volume status. Displays the runtime of the projector.
162 - ENGLISH
Error information page

When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the [SELF TEST] display field of the [Projector status]
screen, click it to display the content of the error/warning.
ffThe projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error.
1
2
1 Display of error information 2 Error code

Displays the alphanumeric symbols and content of errors/
warnings that occur.
For the details of the display content, refer to “[SELF TEST]
display” (x page 208).
[Network status] page

Click [Status] → [Network status].
The current network setting status is displayed.
1
2
1 [WIRED LAN] 2 [WIRELESS LAN]

Displays the settings of wired LAN. Displays the settings of wireless LAN when the optional
Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300) is attached.
ENGLISH - 163
[Access error log] page

Click [Status] → [Access error log].
The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with
unauthorized user names or passwords.
[Mail error log] page

Click [Status] → [Mail error log].
E-mail error log is displayed if periodic E-mail sending has failed.
Note
ff [Access error log] and [Mail error log] display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many
accesses/requests are made at once.
ff Logs in [Access error log] and [Mail error log] are deleted from the oldest when exceeding a certain amount.
ff Check [Access error log] and [Mail error log] periodically.
[Basic control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Basic control].
1
2
3
4
1 [POWER] 4 [SYSTEM]
Turns off/on the power. Switches the system method.
2 [SHUTTER] 5 On-screen display of the projector
Switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter: Displays the same items as shown on the on-screen display
closed)/disabled (shutter: open)). of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the
3 [OSD] menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is
Switches on (display)/off (hide) the on-screen display function. set to off (hide).
6 [INPUT SELECT]
Switches the input signal.
164 - ENGLISH
[Detail control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control].
2
6
3 7
4 8
5 9
1 Control of the projector 5 [MUTE]

The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same Switches whether to use the mute function.
way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the on- 6 [STATUS]
screen display of the projector at the right of the control page is The [STATUS] screen is displayed on the projected image.
updated.
7 [LENS]
2 [SUB MEMORY] Displays the [LENS] page.
Switches the sub memory.
8 [TEST PATTERN]
3 [DAYLIGHT VIEW] Displays the test pattern.
Switches the day light view setting.
9 [GET OSD]
4 [FREEZE] Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the
Temporarily pauses the image. control page.
[LENS] page
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS].
3
4
5
1 [HOME POSITION] 3 [FOCUS]

Moves the projection lens to the home position. Click qw to adjust the focus.
2 [SHIFT] The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down the
Click asqw to adjust the lens shift (vertical position and button for approximately three seconds or longer.
horizontal position). 4 [ZOOM]
The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down the Click qw to adjust the zoom.
button for approximately three seconds or longer. The adjustment can be performed faster by clicking and holding
the button for approximately three seconds or longer.
5 [Back]
Returns to the [Detail control] page.
ENGLISH - 165
[Network config] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Network config].
1) Click [Network config].

ffClick [Network config] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.
2) Place a check mark in the item to change the setting.

ffThe [WIRELESS LAN] setting can be selected only when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.:
ET‑WM300) is attached.
3) Click the [Next] button.
ffThe current settings are displayed.
4) Click the [Change] button.
ffThe setting change screen is displayed. Set following the instruction on the screen.
166 - ENGLISH
When [WIRED LAN] is selected
9
10
11
1
2
3 12
4
5
13
6
7 11
8
1 [DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF] 8 [Back], [Next]

To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP ON]. Click the [Back] button to return to the previous screen. When
2 [IP ADDRESS] [EAP] is set to anything other than [NONE], clicking the [Next]
Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server. button will advance to next page. When [EAP] is set to [NONE],
clicking the [Next] button will display the screen to confirm the
3 [SUBNET MASK]
setting. Click the [Submit] button to update the setting.
Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.
9 [USER NAME]
4 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Enter the user name to be used for authentication in single-byte
Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP
alphanumeric characters (excluding the space). (Maximum of
server.
64 characters)
5 [DNS1]
10 [PASSWORD]
Enter the DNS1 server address.
Enter the password to be used for authentication in single-byte
Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address
alphanumeric characters. (Maximum of 64 characters)
(primary):
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.) 11 [Back], [Next]
(Example: 192.168.0.253) Click the [Back] button to return to the original screen. Click the
[Next] button to display the setting confirmation screen. Click
6 [DNS2]
the [Submit] button to update the setting.
Enter the DNS2 server address.
Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address 12 [DIGITAL CERTIFICATE]
(secondary): Registers the electronic certificate to be used for authentication
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.) (file extension: PFX).
(Example: 192.168.0.254) 13 [CA CERTIFICATE]
7 [EAP] Registers the CA certificate to be used for authentication (file
Select the EAP set in the RADIUS server. extension: CER).
Note
ff When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click
[Network config] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.
ff The connection may be disconnected when the LAN setting is changed while connected with LAN.
When [SIMPLE] (wireless LAN) is selected
1
2
1 [KEY] 2 [Back], [Next]

Set the key to be used with simple. Click the [Back] button to return to the previous screen. Click
Enter 8 to 15 characters of single-byte alphanumeric. the [Next] button to display the screen to confirm the setting.
Click the [Submit] button to update the setting.
ENGLISH - 167
When [M-DIRECT] (wireless LAN) is selected
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 [IP ADDRESS] 5 [KEY]

Enter the IP address. Set the key to be used with M-DIRECT.
2 [SUBNET MASK] Enter 8 to 63 characters of ASCII character, or 64-digit
Enter the subnet mask. hexadecimal number.
3 [SSID] 6 [Back], [Next]
Set SSID to be used with M-DIRECT with single-byte Click the [Back] button to return to the previous screen. Click
alphanumeric. the [Next] button to display the screen to confirm the setting.
Click the [Submit] button to update the setting.
4 [CHANNEL]
Select the channel to be used with M-DIRECT.
Note
ff Do not use in ANY connection with SSID set to “any” or “ANY” character string.
168 - ENGLISH
When [USER] (wireless LAN) is selected
11
13
1 12
2
3 14
4 15
5 12
6
7 11
14
8 15
12
14
15
16
9 17
10 12
11
8 14
15
16
11 17
12
12
1 [DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF] 10 [EAP]

To enable the DHCP client function, set [DHCP ON]. Select the EAP set for the RADIUS server.
2 [IP ADDRESS] 11 [ENCRYPTION]
Enter the IP address if the DHCP server is not used. Select the encryption method used for the communication
3 [SUBNET MASK] between the projector and the network.
Enter the subnet mask if the DHCP server is not used. 12 [Back], [Next]
4 [DEFAULT GATEWAY] Click the [Back] button to return to the previous screen. Click
Enter the default gateway address if the DHCP server is not the [Next] button to display the screen to confirm the setting.
used. Click the [Submit] button to update the setting.
5 [DNS1] 13 [KEY]
Enter the DNS1 server address. Set the key to be used with USER.
Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address Enter 8 to 63 characters of ASCII character, or 64-digit
(primary): hexadecimal number.
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.) 14 [USER NAME]
6 [DNS2] Enter the user name to be used for authentication in single-byte
Enter the DNS2 server address. alphanumeric characters (excluding the space). (Maximum of
Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address 64 characters)
(secondary): 15 [PASSWORD]
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.) Enter the password to be used for authentication in single-byte
7 [SSID] alphanumeric characters. (Maximum of 64 characters)
Enter the same string as the SSID registered to the access 16 [DIGITAL CERTIFICATE]
point. Registers the electronic certificate to be used for authentication
8 [Back], [Next] (file extension: PFX).
Click the [Back] button to return to the previous screen. Click 17 [CA CERTIFICATE]
the [Next] button to proceed to the next screen. Registers the CA certificate to be used for authentication (file
9 [AUTHENTICATION] extension: CER).
Select the user authentication method used in the network to
which the projector is connected.
Note
ff The content of setting varies depending on the authentication method of the wireless LAN to be connected.
ENGLISH - 169
[Adjust clock] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 [Time Zone] 5 [Date]

Select the time zone. Enter the date to be changed.
2 [Set time zone] 6 [Time]
Updates the time zone setting. Enter the time to be changed.
3 [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] 7 [Set date and time]
Set to [ON] when setting the date and time automatically. Updates the date and time settings.
4 [NTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when
you set to adjust the date and time manually.
(To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.)
Note
ff The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult
your dealer.
[Ping test] page

Check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].
1
3
2
1 [Input IP address] 3 Example of display when the connection has succeeded

Enter the IP address of the server to be tested. 4 Example of display when the connection has failed
2 [Submit]
Executes the connection test.
170 - ENGLISH
[E-mail set up] page

When there is a problem or the runtime of the light source reaches the preset value, an E-mail can be sent to
previously set E-mail addresses (up to two addresses).
Click [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 [ENABLE] 5 [MINIMUM TIME]

Select [Enable] to use the E-mail function. Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning
2 [SMTP SERVER NAME] E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another
Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the
(SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning
set up. temperature.
3 [MAIL FROM] 6 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63 characters Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning
in single byte) mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the
temperature exceeds this value.
4 [MEMO]
Enter information such as the location of the projector that
notifies the sender of the E-mail. (Up to 63 characters in single
byte)
7
8
7 [E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2] 8 Settings of the conditions to send E-mail
Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS Select the conditions to send E-mail.
2] blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used. [MAIL CONTENTS]:
Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].
[ERROR]:
Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:
Send an E-mail when the intake air temperature has reached
the value set at the above field.
[PERIODIC REPORT]:
Place a check mark on this to send an E-mail periodically.
It will be sent on the days and time with the check mark.
9 [Submit]
Update the settings.
ENGLISH - 171
[Authentication set up] page

Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [Auth] 5 [Password]
Select the authentication method specified by your Internet Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.
service provider. 6 [SMTP server port]
2 [SMTP Auth] Enter the port number of the SMTP server.
Set when the SMTP authentication is selected. (Normally 25)
3 [POP server name] 7 [POP server port]
Enter the POP server name. Enter the port number of the POP server.
Allowed characters: (Normally 110)
Alphanumerics (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9) 8 [Submit]
Minus sign (-) and period (.) Update the settings.
4 [User name]
Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server.
[ECO management set up] page

Settings related to the ECO management function of the projector can be made.
Click [Detailed set up] → [ECO management set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [LIGHT POWER] 5 [TIMER]

Displays the [LIGHT POWER] setting. Select the time until the light source is turned off after the power
2 [AMBIENT LIGHT DETECTION] management function is operated.
Enables ([ON])/disables ([OFF]) the ambient light detection 6 [QUIK STARTUP]
function. Displays the [QUICK STARTUP] setting.
3 [SIGNAL DETECTION] 7 [VALID PERIOD]
Enables ([ON])/disables ([OFF]) the signal detection function. Select the valid period until the [QUICK STARTUP] function is
4 [POWER MANAGEMENT] disabled after going into the standby mode.
Displays the [POWER MANAGEMENT] setting. 8 [Submit]
Updates the setting.
Note
ff For details of each setting item, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu of the projector → [ECO MANAGEMENT].
172 - ENGLISH
Contents of E-mail sent
Example of the E-mail sent when E-mail is set

The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.
=== Panasonic projector report(CONFIGURE) ===
Projector Type : PT-MZ770
Serial No : 123456789
----- E-mail setup data -----

TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME at [ 60] minutes interval
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Over [ 32 degC / 89 degF ]
ERROR [ ON ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ ON ]
PERIODIC REPORT
Sunday [ OFF ] Monday [ OFF ] Tuesday [ OFF ] Wednesday [ OFF ]
Thursday [ OFF ] Friday [ OFF ] Saturday [ OFF ]
00:00 [ OFF ] 01:00 [ OFF ] 02:00 [ OFF ] 03:00 [ OFF ]

04:00 [ OFF ] 05:00 [ OFF ] 06:00 [ OFF ] 07:00 [ OFF ]
08:00 [ OFF ] 09:00 [ OFF ] 10:00 [ OFF ] 11:00 [ OFF ]
12:00 [ OFF ] 13:00 [ OFF ] 14:00 [ OFF ] 15:00 [ OFF ]
16:00 [ OFF ] 17:00 [ OFF ] 18:00 [ OFF ] 19:00 [ OFF ]
20:00 [ OFF ] 21:00 [ OFF ] 22:00 [ OFF ] 23:00 [ OFF ]
----- Error information -----
Error code :
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Intake air temperature : 30 degC / 86 degF

Exhaust air temperature : 50 degC / 122 degF
Light temperature1 : 31 degC / 87 degF
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 10 H
POWER ON 5 times
LIGHT RUNTIME 25 H
LIGHT ON 6 times
----- Current status -----

MAIN VERSION 1.00
SUB VERSION 1.00
LIGHT STATUS LIGHT=OFF
INPUT DIGITAL LINK
REMOTE1 STATUS ENABLE
----- Wired network configuration -----

DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.0.100
MAC address 7E:D6:57:86:D9:0F
----- Wireless network configuration -----

DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.13.166
MAC address 7C:B7:33:1C:9B:98
Mon Jan 01 12:34:56 20XX
----- Memo -----
Note
ff Information of the wireless LAN is displayed when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300) is attached.
ENGLISH - 173
Example of the E-mail sent for an error

The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.
=== Panasonic projector report(ERROR) ===

Projector Type : PT-MZ770
Serial No : 123456789
----- E-mail setup data -----

TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME at [ 60] minutes interval
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Over [ 32 degC / 89 degF ]
ERROR [ ON ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ ON ]
PERIODIC REPORT
Sunday [ OFF ] Monday [ OFF ] Tuesday [ OFF ] Wednesday [ OFF ]
Thursday [ OFF ] Friday [ OFF ] Saturday [ OFF ]
00:00 [ OFF ] 01:00 [ OFF ] 02:00 [ OFF ] 03:00 [ OFF ]

04:00 [ OFF ] 05:00 [ OFF ] 06:00 [ OFF ] 07:00 [ OFF ]
08:00 [ OFF ] 09:00 [ OFF ] 10:00 [ OFF ] 11:00 [ OFF ]
12:00 [ OFF ] 13:00 [ OFF ] 14:00 [ OFF ] 15:00 [ OFF ]
16:00 [ OFF ] 17:00 [ OFF ] 18:00 [ OFF ] 19:00 [ OFF ]
20:00 [ OFF ] 21:00 [ OFF ] 22:00 [ OFF ] 23:00 [ OFF ]
----- Error information -----

U21 Intake air temp. error
Error code :
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10
Intake air temperature : 30 degC / 86 degF

Exhaust air temperature : 50 degC / 122 degF
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 10 H
POWER ON 5 times
LIGHT RUNTIME 25 H
LIGHT ON 6 times
----- Current status -----

MAIN VERSION 1.00
SUB VERSION 1.00
LIGHT STATUS LIGHT=OFF
INPUT DIGITAL LINK
REMOTE1 STATUS ENABLE
----- Wired network configuration -----

DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.0.100
MAC address 7E:D6:57:86:D9:0F
----- Wireless network configuration -----

DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.13.166
MAC address 7C:B7:33:1C:9B:98
Mon Jan 01 12:34:56 20XX
----- Memo -----
Note
ff Information of the wireless LAN is displayed when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300) is attached.
174 - ENGLISH
[Change password] page

Click [Change password].
1
2
3
4
1 [Administrator] 3 [Moderator]
Used to change the setting of the [Administrator]. Select this item to change the [Moderator] setting.
2 [User] 4 [Next]
Used to change the setting of the [User]. Used to change the setting of the password.
Note
ff The [Moderator] account is used when operating in the moderator mode when the MIRRORING input or the Panasonic APPLICATION input
is selected.
[Administrator] account
1 [Account] 3 [New]
Displays the account to change. [User name]:
2 [Current] Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
[User name]: byte)
Enter the user name before the change. [Password]:
[Password]: Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
Enter the current password. byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
4 [Change]
Determines the change of password.
Note
ff When the projector is already registered in application software (such as “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” or “Smart Projector Control”)
which uses the communication control via LAN, communication with the projector will become impossible if a user name or password for
[Administrator] is changed. If a user name or password for [Administrator] is changed, update the registration information of the application
software in use.
ENGLISH - 175
[User] and [Moderator]
1 [Account] 3 [Change]
Displays the account to change. Determines the change of password.
2 [New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
[Change password] (For user rights)

Only the change of password is enabled under the user rights.
1
2
3
4
1 [Old Password] 3 [Retype]

Enter the current password. Enter the desired new password again.
2 [New Password] 4 [Change]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single Determines the change of password.
byte)
Note
ff To change the account of the [Administrator], entry of [User name] and [Password] in [Current] is required.
[Crestron Connected(TM)] page

The projector can be monitored/controlled with Crestron Connected.
It is necessary to access with the administrator rights to start the operation screen of Crestron Connected from
the web control screen. (The [Crestron Connected(TM)] button is not displayed in the Web control screen with the
user rights.)
The operation page of Crestron Connected is displayed by clicking [Crestron Connected(TM)].
It is not displayed if Adobe Flash Player is not installed on your computer, or the browser you use does not
support Flash. In such a case, click [Back] in the operation page to go back to the previous page.
176 - ENGLISH
Operation page
1
2
3
4
5
1 [Tools], [Info], [Help] 5 [Input Select]

Tabs for selecting the setting, information, or help page of the Controls input selection.
projector. Not available when the power of the projector is turned off.
2 [POWER] 6 Menu screen control buttons
Turns off/on the power. Navigates the menu screen.
3 [VOL DOWN], [VOL UP] 7 Freeze/image quality adjustment
Adjusts the volume. Controls items related to freeze/image quality.
4 [SHUTTER] 8 [Back]
Switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter: Returns to the previous page.
closed)/disabled (shutter: open)).
[Tools] page
Click [Tools] in the operation page.
1 [Control System] 4 Network status

Set the information required for communicating with the Displays the settings of wired LAN.
controller to be connected with the projector. [DHCP]
2 [User Password] Displays the current setting.
Set the user rights password for the operation page of Crestron [Ip Address]
Connected. Displays the current setting.
[Subnet Mask]
3 [Admin Password]
Displays the current setting.
Set the administrator rights password for the operation page of
[Default Gateway]
Crestron Connected.
[DNS Server]
5 [Exit]
Returns to the operation page.
ENGLISH - 177
[Info] page
Click [Info] in the operation page.
1 4
5
2
3 6
7
1 [Projector Name] 5 [Source]

Displays the projector name. Displays the selected input.
2 [Mac Address] 6 [Lamp Mode]
Displays the MAC address. Displays the [LIGHT POWER] setting.
3 [Lamp Hours] 7 [Error Status]
Displays the runtime of the light source. Displays the error status.
4 [Power Status] 8 [Exit]
Displays the status of the power. Returns to the operation page.
[Help] page
Click [Help] in the operation page.
The [Help Desk] window is displayed.
1 [Help Desk]
A message can be sent/received with the administrator using
the Crestron Connected.
178 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5 Operations — Projecting with Panasonic APPLICATION input
Projecting with Panasonic APPLICATION input

Using the Panasonic application, the image sent from a device connected via LAN can be displayed as a
projected image.
Application that can be used

The image transfer application software used for Panasonic APPLICATION input are as follows.
ffWireless Manager ME6.4
ffPlug and Share
ffWireless Projector for iOS, Wireless Projector for Android
Note
ff For details of the installation method of the application software, connection method to the projector, and operation method, refer to the
Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ff “Plug and Share” allows to write the connection information between the image transfer application software “Plug and Share”, and the
projector and the USB memory by attaching the USB memory to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal of the projector. By connecting this
paired USB memory to the USB terminal of the Windows computer or Mac, “Plug and Share” will automatically start up and perform the
connection operation to the projector. For details on the pairing method, refer to “Using the pairing function” (x page 195).
Connecting the device
1) Press the <NETWORK/USB> button to switch the input to Panasonic APPLICATION.

ffEvery time the <NETWORK/USB> button is pressed, the input will switch in the order of MEMORY
VIEWER, Panasonic APPLICATION, and MIRRORING. Press the <NETWORK/USB> button until the input
switches to Panasonic APPLICATION.
ffThe standby screen is displayed once the input is switched to Panasonic APPLICATION.
ffThe standby screen differs depending on the setting in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN].
For details on the standby screen, refer to “Description of the standby screen” (x page 180).
2) Connect the device with the image transfer application software started to the projector.
ffThe image sent to the projector by the operation on the device is displayed as the projected image.
Note
ff For details of the connection method to the projector using the application software, refer to the Operation Instruction of each application
software.
ff When the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button on the remote control or the <LENS/CANCEL> button on the control panel is pressed while
displaying the image from the device, the information such as the network ID, the projector name, or the QR code is displayed on the
screen. For details of these information, refer to “Description of the standby screen” (x page 180).
Ending the connection with the device
1) Perform disconnection process in the device side.

ffOnce the connection is disconnected, the standby screen is displayed.
Note
ff It may take some time for the standby screen to display when the connection is ended forcefully by turning off the device, etc., without
performing an appropriate disconnection process.
ENGLISH - 179
Description of the standby screen

The standby screen differs depending on the setting in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN].
rrWhen [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [SIMPLE]
4
3 5
1 Network ID/projector name 4 [SSID]

Displays the network ID of the projector and the projector name Displays the SSID to be used.
set for this projector. 5 [KEY]
2 QR code Displays the key to be used.
The connection information to connect to the projector using the It is normally displayed as *. Press the <AUTO SETUP/
“Wireless Projector”. CANCEL> button on the remote control or the <LENS/
3 Connection method CANCEL> button on the control panel to display the character
Displays the setting in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → string.
[WIRELESS LAN]. In this case, it is displayed as [SIMPLE].
Note
ff The QR code is used when connecting to the projector using the “Wireless Projector”.
rrWhen [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [SIMPLE]
1 Network ID/projector name 2 Connection method

Displays the network ID of the projector and the projector name Displays the setting in the [NETWORK/USB] menu →
set for this projector. [WIRELESS LAN]. In this case, it is displayed as [M-DIRECT]
or [USER].
180 - ENGLISH
Using the moderator mode in the Panasonic APPLICATION input

When using the projector in the moderator mode, the moderator can specify the image to allow to display by
operating the projector when multiple devices are connected to the projector.
1) Set the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [Panasonic APPLICATION] → [MODERATOR MODE] to [ON].

ffThe screen to display in thumbnail view is displayed once the input is switched to Panasonic
APPLICATION.
3) Connect the device with the image transfer application software started to the projector.
ffThe image sent to the projector by the operation on the device is displayed in thumbnail view.
ffImages from maximum of 16 devices can be displayed in the screen in thumbnail view.
4) Press asqw to select the device to display the image in full screen, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSelect the image to display in full screen from the images displayed in thumbnail.
ffAfter a while, the selected image is displayed in full screen.
Note
ff For details of the connection method to the projector and operation method using the application software, refer to the Operating Instruction
of each application software.
ff For details on moderator mode setting, refer to the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [Panasonic APPLICATION] (x page 148).
ff Press the <ENTER> button while displaying the image in full screen to return to the screen in thumbnail view. Select different image by
pressing asqw to switch the image to display.
ff When the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button on the remote control or the <LENS/CANCEL> button on the control panel is pressed while
displaying the image from the device, the information such as the network ID, the projector name, or the QR code is displayed on the
screen. For details of these information, refer to “Description of the standby screen” (x page 180).
ff When “Wireless Manager ME6.4” or “Wireless Projector” is used, selection of the image to display in full screen can be operated from the
web browser. For details, refer to the Operation Instructions of each application software.
ff When the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [SIMPLE] or [M-DIRECT], the number of devices that can connect to the
projector via wireless LAN is restricted to 10 devices.
ENGLISH - 181
Chapter 5 Operations — Projecting with MIRRORING input
Projecting with MIRRORING input

By using the mirroring function, the screen of the Miracast compatible device can be displayed as a projected
image.
ffTo use the mirroring function, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: ET‑WM300).
Connecting the device
1) Press the <NETWORK/USB> button to switch the input to MIRRORING.

switches to MIRRORING.
ffThe standby screen is displayed once the input is switched to MIRRORING.
Receiving device name
2) Search the display device that can be connected on the Miracast compatible device, and select this
projector and connect it.
ffConfirm the receiving device name displayed in the standby screen, and select the device name
corresponding to this projector from the search result displayed in the device screen.
ffWhen the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MIRRORING] → [CONNECTION TYPE] is set to [PIN], entry of PIN
may be requested at the time of connection. In such case, enter the eight-digit PIN code displayed at the
top of the standby screen.
ffAfter a while, the screen of the device is displayed as a projected image.
PIN code
Note
ff The operation method may differ depending on the device or the application software in use.
ff For details of connection by the mirroring function, refer to the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MIRRORING] (x page 150).
ff The mirroring function cannot be used when the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [DISABLE].
ff The receiving device name displayed in the standby screen is constructed by the projector name set to the projector and the network ID
unique to the projector.
182 - ENGLISH
ff Press the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button while displaying the device screen to display the receiving device name at the top left of the
screen.
Ending the connection with the device
1) Perform disconnection process in the device side.

ffOnce the connection is disconnected, the standby screen is displayed.
Note
ff It may take some time for the standby screen to display when the connection is ended forcefully by turning off the device, etc., without
performing an appropriate disconnection process.
Using the moderator mode in the MIRRORING input

When using the projector in the moderator mode, the moderator can specify the device allowed to display by
operating the projector when multiple devices are connected to the projector for mirroring.
1) Set the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MIRRORING] → [MODERATOR MODE] to [ON].

3) Search the display that can be connected on the Miracast compatible device, and select this
projector.
4) Press as to select the device to allow connection, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSelect the device to display its screen from the device names displayed in the standby screen.
ffAfter a while, the screen of the selected device is displayed as a projected image.
Note
ff The operation method may differ depending on the device or the application software in use.
ff For details on moderator mode setting, refer to the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MIRRORING] (x page 150).
ff The device name displayed in the standby screen differs depending on the device and the application software that is used. In case of the
Miracast compatible Windows computer, the computer name is displayed.
ff Press either as or the <ENTER> button while displaying the screen of the device to display the standby screen.
ff Selection of the device to display can also be performed on the web browser. For details, refer to “Operating with the web browser”
(x page 184).
ff Press the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button while displaying the device screen to display the receiving device name at the top left of the
screen.
ENGLISH - 183
Operating with the web browser

When using the projector in the moderator mode, the device to be allow connection can be specified with the web
browser in addition to operation in the standby screen.
1) Set the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MIRRORING] → [MODERATOR MODE] to [ON].

3) Search the display that can be connected to the Miracast compatible device, and select this projector.
ffThe receiving device name and the URL to access the projector is displayed at the top left of the screen.
5) Start the web browser in the moderator device.
ffPerform the operation in Step 3) in advance on the moderator device.
ffFor the browser that can be used, refer to “Computer that can be used for setting” (x page 159).
6) Enter the address displayed in Step 4) into the URL entry field of the web browser.
7) Enter the user name and password with moderator rights.

ffThe factory default setting of the user name is moderator, and the password is @Panasonic.
8) Click OK.
ffThe [MODERATOR MODE] page is displayed.
9) Click the device to allow connection.

ffSelect the device to display the screen with the projector from the names of devices displayed in the
[MODERATOR MODE] page.
ffAfter a while, the screen of the selected device is displayed as a projected image.
Note
ff Click another device in the [MODERATOR MODE] page while projecting the screen of the device and switch the display to the screen of that
device. Clicking the device being projected will end the projection of the device, and display the standby screen.
ff The [MODERATOR MODE] page can be operated with the user name and password with the administrator rights for the web control screen.
184 - ENGLISH
Description of the [MODERATOR MODE] page
1
2
1 Connection destination 3 Device list

Displays the receiving device name that is connected. Click the device name to display the screen of that device as a
2 Language switching button projected image.
Switches the display language (Japanese/English).
Note
ff The user name and password with moderator rights can be changed in the “[Change password] page” (x page 175) of the web control
screen.
ENGLISH - 185
Chapter 5 Operations — Projecting with MEMORY VIEWER input
Projecting with MEMORY VIEWER input

Display the still image or movie recorded in the USB memory as a projected image using the Memory Viewer
function.
Images that can be played back with the Memory Viewer function
The following still image/movie files can be played back on the projector.
Extension Format Restriction
Number of pixels: Maximum 8 000 x 8 000
(For progressive format, maximum 4 096 x 4 096)
jpg/jpeg JPEG
YUV format: Only YUV444, YUV422, and YUV411 supported
Still
Color mode: Only RGB supported
image
Number of pixels: Maximum 2 000 x 2 000
(1 bit, 4 bits, 8 bits, 16 bits, 24 bits, 32 bits supported)
bmp Windows Bitmap
Following formats are not supported.
Run-length encoding, Bit fields, Top to bottom, Transparent data
Codec Restriction*1
Extension
Video Audio Video Audio
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC AAC
mov
Motion JPEG Linear PCM
Sample rate:
MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3 Resolution:
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC Maximum 48 kHz
(MP3) Maximum 1 920 x 1 080
Movie avi Motion JPEG (For Linear PCM,
AAC Minimum 240 x 180
MPEG-4 maximum 16 kHz)
Linear PCM Frame rate:
Channel:
Maximum 30 fps
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC AAC Maximum 2 ch
mp4 Bit rate:
MPEG-4 MPEG-4 AAC-LC Bit rate:
Maximum 40 Mbps
mpg/mpeg MPEG-2 MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-2 Maximum 384 kbps
wmv WMV9 WMA
*1 Following movie files are not supported.

ffFiles with the video codec of WMV7, WMV8, DivX, or Xvid
ffUncompressed video
ffMulti-angle video
ffFiles with the profile of Advanced Simple Profile @ Level 0 or Advanced Simple Profile @ Level 1
Note
ff Some information for still image/movie files can be viewed with a computer where relevant files are accessible.
Operation example
gg For Windows computer
1. Right-click a file, and click [Properties].

2. Click the [Details] tab.
gg For Mac
1. Click a file while holding down the “Control” key, and click [Get Info].
2. Click [More Info].
ff File size that can be played back is 2 GB at the maximum.

ff Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played back.
ff The total number of folders/files that can be recognized on the projector is 1 000 at the maximum. If there are 1 001 or more folders/files, an
error message is displayed.
ff Some files cannot be played back even if the formats are supported.
ff For USB memory that can be used with the projector, refer to “USB memory that can be used with the projector” (x page 70).
186 - ENGLISH
Displaying the Memory Viewer screen

When the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [AUTOPLAY] is set to [ON] or [OFF], the still image
or movie file can be selected and played back in the Memory Viewer screen.
When [AUTOPLAY] is set to [SCENARIO], the Memory Viewer screen is not displayed, and projection of still
image or movie and transmission of the Light ID signal are performed automatically following the setting of the
scenario file.
For operation of [SCENARIO], refer to “Playing back using the contents list” (x page 194).
1) Connect the USB memory with still image or movie file recorded to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
ffFor the handling of the USB memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” (x page 70).
2) Press the <NETWORK/USB> button to switch the input to MEMORY VIEWER.
switches to MEMORY VIEWER.
ffThe Memory Viewer screen (thumbnail or list view) is displayed.
ffThe cursor is at the thumbnail display area or the list display area at the right of the screen. (Cursor
background color: yellow)
Example of displaying in thumbnail view Example of displaying in list view
Note
ff Display method (displaying in thumbnail view or list view) in the Memory Viewer screen can be set in the [NETWORK/USB] menu →
[MEMORY VIEWER] → [VIEW] (x page 147).
Operating the Memory Viewer screen

This section describes an example of screen operations after the Memory Viewer screen is displayed.
For thumbnail view
1) Press asqw to select a file.

ffSelect a folder in the thumbnail display area and press the <ENTER> button to display the files inside that
folder.
ENGLISH - 187
ffPress the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button to move the cursor from the thumbnail display area at the right
of the screen to the folder list at the left of the screen. Press as to select a folder and press the <ENTER>
button to display the files inside that folder in the thumbnail display area, and move the cursor to the
thumbnail display area.
ffThe information of the selected still image or movie file is displayed in the information area at the bottom left
of the screen.
ffPlayback starts in the full-screen display.
ffFor details on playback procedure, refer to “Playing back still images” (x page 189) or “Playing back
movies” (x page 190).
3) Press the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button to end playback.
ffFull-screen display ends and the Memory Viewer screen (thumbnail view) is displayed.
ffTo subsequently play back another file, perform Steps 1) to 2).
Note
ff Every time the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button is pressed while displaying the Memory Viewer screen, the cursor will move between the
folder list and the thumbnail display areas.
ff The display order of the thumbnail follows the setting in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [SORT] (x page 147).
For list view
1) Press as to select a file.

ffSelect a folder in the list display area and press the <ENTER> button to display the files inside that folder.
ffPress the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button to move the cursor from the list display area at the right of
the screen to the folder list at the left of the screen. Press as to select a folder and press the <ENTER>
button to display the files inside that folder in the list display area, and move the cursor to the list display
area.
ffThe thumbnail of the selected still image or movie file is displayed in the area on the lower left of the
screen.
ffFor details on playback procedure, refer to “Playing back still images” (x page 189) or “Playing back
movies” (x page 190).
3) Press the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button to end playback.
ffFull-screen display ends and the Memory Viewer screen (list view) is displayed.
ffTo subsequently play back another file, perform Steps 1) to 2).
Note
ff Every time the <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button is pressed while displaying the Memory Viewer screen, the cursor will move between the
folder list and the list display areas.
ff The display order of the list follows the setting in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [SORT] (x page 147).
188 - ENGLISH
Playing back still images

This section describes the procedure using an operation example on the Memory Viewer screen in thumbnail
view.
Playback on the Memory Viewer screen in list view can be performed with the same procedure except for the file
selection.
PREV NEXT ENTER PLAY MENU MENU CANCEL RETURN Operation guide
Example of display during automatic playback (still image)
When automatic playback is enabled

This section describes the operation method when the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] →
[AUTOPLAY] (x page 147) is set to [ON].
In this case, all the still image files inside a single folder is automatically played back following the setting in the
[NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] (x page 146) → [INTERVAL] and [EFFECT].
1) Press asqw to select a file to be projected first from the thumbnails, and press the <ENTER>
button.
ffPress the <ENTER> button during playback to pause automatic playback. Press it again to resume
playback.
ffAfter playback ends, playback of the next file starts.
ffPress w during playback to continue the automatic playback from the next image after skipping the file
currently playing back.
ffPress q during playback to continue the automatic playback after returning back to the previous file.
ffPress a during playback to rotate the image 90° clockwise while retaining the aspect ratio.
ffPress s during playback to rotate the image 90° counterclockwise while retaining the aspect ratio.
ffAutomatic playback ends and the Memory Viewer screen (thumbnail view) returns.
When automatic playback is disabled

[AUTOPLAY] (x page 147) is set to [OFF]. In this case, files to be projected are selected and played back one
by one.
1) Press asqw to select a file from the thumbnail, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe selected still image is played back in the full-screen display.
ffPress w to playback the next file.
ffPress q to playback the previous file.
ffPress a to rotate the image 90° clockwise while retaining the aspect ratio.
ffPress s to rotate the image 90° counterclockwise while retaining the aspect ratio.
ffFull-screen display ends and the Memory Viewer screen in thumbnail view returns.
ENGLISH - 189
Note
ff When the recorded number of pixels is smaller than the maximum number of display dot*1, it will be displayed enlarged maintaining the
aspect ratio.
ff When the recorded number of pixels is larger than the maximum number of display dot*1, it will be displayed reduced maintaining the aspect
ratio.
ff Order of the playback follows the display order set in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [SORT] (x page 147).
Also in the cases where still image and movie files both exist in the same folder, they are played back according to the [SORT] setting.
ff The operating guide at the bottom of the playback screen can be erased by setting the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] →
[GUIDE] (x page 147) to [OFF].
ff When switching the input to [MEMOERY VIEWER] while [AUTOPLAY] is set to [ON], automatic playback starts.
ff Playback ends and the Memory Viewer screen returns when the contents list is distributed using the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”
during playback. To resume the playback of still images, perform the playback operation after the distribution of contents list is completed.
*1 The maximum number of display dot for each product is as follows.
PT‑MZ770: 1 920 x 1 080
PT‑MW730: 1 280 x 800
Playing back movies

This section describes the procedure using an operation example on the Memory Viewer screen in thumbnail
view.
Playback on the Memory Viewer screen in list view can be performed with the same procedure except for the file
selection.
Status display
Time bar
RF FF PLAY FROM BEGINNING ENTER PLAY MENU MENU CANCEL RETURN Operation guide
Example of display during fast-forward playback (x10 speed)
When automatic playback is enabled

[AUTOPLAY] (x page 147) is set to [ON].
In this case, all movie files in the same folder are played back automatically.
1) Press asqw to select a file to be projected first from the thumbnails, and press the <ENTER>
button.
ffPress the <ENTER> button during playback to pause playback. Press it again to resume playback from the
position where the playback has been stopped.
ffAfter playback ends, playback of the next file starts.
ffPress w during playback to perform the fast-forward playback. The speed is increased every time w is
pressed. (3 levels)
ffPress q during playback to perform the rewind playback. The speed is increased every time q is pressed.
(3 levels)
ffPress a during playback to play back the file being played back from the start. (cue)
ffPress w while paused to play back the next file skipping the file being played back.
ffPress q while paused to go back and play back the previous file.
ffAutomatic playback ends and the Memory Viewer screen (thumbnail view) returns.
190 - ENGLISH
When automatic playback is disabled

[AUTOPLAY] (x page 147) is set to [OFF].
In this case, files to be projected are selected and played back one by one.
1) Press asqw to select a file from the thumbnail, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffPress the <ENTER> button during playback to pause playback. Press it again to resume playback from the
position where the playback has been stopped.
ffAfter playback ends, playback goes into pause state at the beginning of the file.
ffPress w during playback to perform the fast-forward playback. The speed is increased every time w is
pressed. (3 levels)
ffPress q during playback to perform the rewind playback. The speed is increased every time q is pressed.
(3 levels)
ffPress a during playback to play back the file being played back from the start. (cue)
ffPress w while paused to play back the next file skipping the file being played back.
ffPress q while paused to go back and play back the previous file.
ffFull-screen display ends and the Memory Viewer screen in thumbnail view returns.
Note
ff When the recorded number of pixels is smaller than the maximum number of display dot*1, it will be displayed enlarged maintaining the
aspect ratio.
ff When the recorded number of pixels is larger than the maximum number of display dot*1, it will be displayed reduced maintaining the aspect
ratio.
ff Order of the playback follows the display order set in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [SORT] (x page 147).
ff The time bar in the operating guide at the bottom of the playback screen can be erased by setting the [NETWORK/USB] menu →
[MEMORY VIEWER] → [GUIDE] (x page 147) to [OFF].
ff When switching the input to [MEMOERY VIEWER] while [AUTOPLAY] is set to [ON], automatic playback starts.
ff Playback ends and the Memory Viewer screen returns when the contents list is distributed using the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”
during playback. To resume the playback of movies, perform the playback operation after the distribution of contents list is completed.
*1 The maximum number of display dot for each product is as follows.
PT‑MZ770: 1 920 x 1 080
PT‑MW730: 1 280 x 800
Resume playback
When the automatic playback is disabled (the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [AUTOPLAY]
(x page 147) is set to [OFF]), resume playback can be performed.
Resume playback is a function that stops movie playback in the middle and restarts playback from the position
where the movie has been stopped the last time when the same file is to be played back next time.
The following operations resume playback from the position where the last playback has been stopped.
ffStopping movie playback in the middle, going back to the Memory Viewer screen, and then selecting the same
movie file again and playing it back
ffAfter playing back other movie or still image files, selecting the previous movie file and playing it back
Note
ff Resume information (information on the position when movie playback is stopped in the middle) is automatically saved at the time when
playback is paused by pressing the <ENTER> button during playback or when full-screen display is ended by pressing the <AUTO SETUP/
CANCEL> button during playback.
ff Resume information (information on the position when movie playback is stopped in the middle) of 50 movie files can be saved. After the
51st movie file is played back, resume information will be deleted in order from the oldest.
ff When resume playback is performed, some files may not be played back from the correct position where the last playback has been
stopped.
ff All resume information is discarded when following operation is performed.
gg Removing the USB memory
gg Disconnecting the power cord
Playing back still images/movies automatically when the projector is turned on

When the following three conditions are met, playback of still images/movies starts automatically when the
projector is turned on.
ffAutomatic playback is enabled
ENGLISH - 191
ggThe [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [AUTOPLAY] (x page 147) is set to [ON]
ffThe input is set to MEMORY VIEWER when the power is turned on to start projection
ggThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] (x page 117) is set to [MEMORY
VIEWER]
ggThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] (x page 117) is set to [LAST USED], and
the power is turned off with the input set to MEMORY VIEWER
ffThere are still image/movie files that can be played back with the Memory Viewer function in the root folder of
the USB memory
Note
ff The playback order follows the display order set in the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [ [MEMORY VIEWER] → [SORT] (x page 147).
ff To play back still image/movie files automatically when the projector is switched on, perform the following setting and operation.
gg Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIAL STARTUP] (x page 117) to [ON]
gg Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIAL STARTUP] (x page 117) to [LAST MEMORY], and turn off the circuit breaker while
projecting or disconnect the plug of the power cord while projecting
192 - ENGLISH
Description of the Memory Viewer screen

The icons on the Memory Viewer screen indicate the following.
An icon to indicate moving to upper hierarchy. Select it to move to the upper hierarchy.
An icon to display folders in lower hierarchy. Select it to move to the lower hierarchy.
An icon to indicate that the file is still image.
An icon to indicate that the file is movie.
An icon to indicate that the extension of the file is supported but it cannot be opened.
Rotates the still image 90° counterclockwise.
Rotates the still image 90° clockwise.
Indicates that fast-forward playback is being performed in approximately x2 speed.
Indicates that playback is being paused.
Indicates that fast-rewind playback is being performed in approximately x2 speed.
ENGLISH - 193
Playing back using the contents list

When the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [AUTOPLAY] is set to [SCENARIO], playback of
still image or movie and transmission of the Light ID signal are performed automatically following the setting of the
contents list saved in the USB memory. To transmit the Light ID signal, it is necessary to set the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [LightID] to [EXTERNAL CONTROL].
The contents list is generated with the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, and it can be saved in the USB
memory, etc. For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
1) Insert the USB memory with the contents list saved into the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
2) Press the <NETWORK/USB> button to switch the input to MEMORY VIEWER.
switches to MEMORY VIEWER.
ffOnce the input is switched to MEMORY VIEWER, playback is repeated automatically following the setting
of the contents list.
3) Press the <NETWORK/USB> button to switch the input to anything other than MEMORY VIEWER to
end.
ffOnce the input is switched to anything other than MEMORY VIEWER, playback using the contents list
ends.
Note
ff The contents list is the following 4 types of file. Generate it in advance using the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
gg Scenario file specifying the playback order and time (scenario.dat)
gg File list summarizing the playback file names (filelist.dat)
gg Light ID definition file to specify the Light ID (lightid.dat)
gg Contents file to project movies and still images (jpg, mp4 etc.)
ff Nothing is played back, when the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [AUTOPLAY] is set to [SCENARIO] and there is no
contents list in the USB memory, or there is defect in it.
ff Playback can also be stopped by setting the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [AUTOPLAY] to anything other than
[SCENARIO].
ff Playback is suspended and the contents list is updated when the contents list is distributed using the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”
during playback using the contents list. Once the update of contents list is completed, playback using the overwritten contents list resumes.
194 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5 Operations — Using the pairing function
Using the pairing function

When the following two conditions are met, the guide for wring the pairing data is displayed in the standby screen
when the USB memory is connected to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
ffThe [NETWORK/USB] menu → [Panasonic APPLICATION] → [PAIRING GUIDE] is set to [ON]
ffInput is Panasonic APPLICATION
By wring the pairing data to the USB memory following the instruction, the pairing of the projector and that USB
memory is completed.
Connection to the projector is automatically performed by attaching the USB memory paired with the projector to
the USB terminal of the Windows computer or Mac, and starting the image transfer application software “Plug and
Share” in the USB memory.
The pairing data is a connection information between the image transfer application software “Plug and Share”,
and the projector and the USB memory.
Attention
ff Do not use a USB extension cable or a USB hub, and directly insert the USB memory into the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal of the
projector.
ff Do not insert the USB memory into the <DC OUT> terminal. The USB memory cannot be used on the <DC OUT> terminal.
Note
ff If the USB memory cannot be directly connected to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal of the projector, such as the projector is installed
on the ceiling, it is possible to download the image transfer application software “Plug and Share” to a USB memory from the Panasonic
website, and use it. Refer to the following URL.
Pairing the USB memory
1) Set the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [Panasonic APPLICATION] → [PAIRING GUIDE] to [ON].

ffThe standby screen is displayed once the input is switched to Panasonic APPLICATION.
3) Connect the USB memory for pairing to the <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal.
ffFor the USB memory that can be used for pairing, refer to “USB memory that can be used with the
projector” (x page 70).
4) When the confirmation message is displayed on the standby screen, press qw to select [OK], and
press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe pairing data is written to the USB memory.
ENGLISH - 195
Chapter 5 Operations — Using the pairing function
5) Once the completion message is displayed in the standby screen, remove the USB memory.
Note
ff Use the commercially available USB memory formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 as the USB memory to be used for pairing. Approximately 30 MB
of available space is required.
ff Displaying of the image using the image transfer application software is not possible during pairing. Also, the pairing function cannot be
used while displaying the image using the image transfer application software.
ff For how to use the image transfer application software “Plug and Share”, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Plug and Share”. Operating
Instructions of “Plug and Share” can be downloaded from the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
196 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance
This chapter describes methods of inspection when there are problems, maintenance, and replacement of the
units.
ENGLISH - 197
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Light source/temperature/filter indicators
Light source/temperature/filter indicators

When an indicator lights up
If a problem occurs inside the projector, the light source indicator <LIGHT>/temperature indicator <TEMP>/filter
indicator <FILTER> will inform you by illuminating or blinking. Check the status of the indicators and take following
measures.
Attention
ff When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector” (x page 66).
Light source indicator <LIGHT>
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Light source indicator <LIGHT>
Blinking in red Blinking in red

Indicator status Lighting in red
(2 times) (3 times)
Some of the elements of the light
The light source does not light up, or the light source turns off while the
Status source are defective and the light
projector is in use.
output has decreased.
Solution ff Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (x page 66), and turn on the power again.
Note
ff If the light source indicator <LIGHT> continues to light or blink even after the measure is taken, set the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>,
and ask your dealer for repair.
198 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Light source/temperature/filter indicators
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Blinking in red Blinking in red

Indicator status Lighting in red
(2 times) (3 times)
Internal temperature is high (standby
Status Internal temperature is high (warning). The cooling fan has stopped.
status).
ff Is the air intake/exhaust port blocked?
Cause ―
ff Is the room temperature high?
ff Remove any objects that are blocking the air intake/exhaust port.
ff Install the projector in a location with the operating environment temperature ff Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to
Solution between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C (113 °F). <OFF> (x page 66), and consult
ff Do not use the projector at high altitudes of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher your dealer.
above sea level.
Note
ff If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Indicator status Lighting in red Blinking in red

The filter is clogged.
Status Air filter unit is not attached.
The ambient or internal temperature is abnormally high.
ff Is the air intake/exhaust port
Cause ff Is the air filter unit dirty? ff Is the air filter unit attached?
blocked?
ff Clean or replace the air filter unit. ff Remove any objects that are
Solution ff Attach the air filter unit.
(x page 200) blocking the air intake/exhaust port.
Note
ff If the filter indicator <FILTER> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
ff If the air filter unit is not attached when the projector is turned on, the filter indicator <FILTER> will blink in red.
ff When clogging of the filter is detected and the brightness of the light source is restricted, the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LightID]
(x page 116) will be set [OFF], and the Light ID signal will not be transmitted. Set it again after clearing the clogging.
ENGLISH - 199
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
Maintenance/replacement
Before performing maintenance/replacement
ffMake sure to turn off the projector and disconnect the power plug from the outlet before maintaining or replacing
the unit. (x pages 58, 66)
ffWhen switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector”
(x page 66).
Maintenance
Outer case
Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.
ffIf the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with
a dry cloth.
ffDo not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may
deteriorate the outer case.
ffWhen using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.
Lens front surface

Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.
ffDo not use a cloth that is fluffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.
ffSince the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.
Attention
ff The lens may be damaged if you hit with a hard object or wipe with excessive force. Handle with care.
Air filter unit

Perform maintenance of the air filter unit in the following case.
ffThe air filter is clogged with dust, causing the filter replacement message to appear on the screen and the filter
indicator <FILTER> to light in red.
Attention
ff Make sure to secure the stability of the projector, and perform the maintenance in a safe location even if the air filter cover or the air filter
unit falls accidentally.
ff When the air filter unit is replaced, reset the filter counter.
If the filter counter is not reset after replacing the air filter unit, [FILTER COUNTER has reached the set time.] is displayed.
For details of resetting the filter counter, refer to “Resetting the filter counter” (x page 202).
Removing the air filter unit
Air filter cover fixing screw Tabs on the projector body Air filter unit compartment and the
projector’s air intake port
Grip Air filter unit

Air filter cover
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Turn off the power of the projector.

ffAlways follow the procedure of “Switching off the projector” (x page 66) when turning off the power.
200 - ENGLISH
2) Remove the air filter cover. (Fig. 1)

ffTurn the air filter cover fixing screw (x 1) counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver until it turns freely, and
remove the air filter cover by placing a finger in the depressed section and pull it out slowly in the direction
of the arrow.
ffWhen pulling out the air filter cover, make sure to place a hand on the air filter cover. Pulling it out too
rapidly may cause the air filter cover to fall.
3) Pull out the air filter unit. (Fig. 2)
ffSlightly push the grip of the air filter unit inward in the direction of the arrow, remove from the tabs on the
projector body, and pull out the air filter unit.
ffAfter pulling out the air filter unit, remove any foreign object and dust from the air filter unit compartment
and the projector’s air intake port.
Performing maintenance of the air filter unit

Remove the air filter unit in advance with the procedure for “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 200) described
previously.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Wash the air filter unit. (Fig. 1)
i) Soak the air filter unit in cold or warm water and then lightly rinse it.
ffDo not use cleaning tools such as brushes.
ffWhen rinsing, hold the frame of the air filter unit without putting strong pressure on the filter unit.
ii) Rinse the air filter unit two to three times using fresh water each time.
ffInsufficient rinsing may result in odors.
2) Dry the air filter unit. (Fig. 2)
ffLet the air filter unit naturally dry off in a well-ventilated place where there is little dust and is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
ffDo not dry using drying devices such as dryers.
ffOnce the air filter is dried, proceed to “Attaching the air filter unit” (x page 201) next.
Attaching the air filter unit
1) Attach the air filter unit to the projector.

ffAttach the air filter unit in the reverse procedure of Step 3) in “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 200).
ffPush in the air filter unit all the way in until it clicks.
2) Attach the air filter cover.
ffClose the air filter cover in the reverse procedure of Step 2) in “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 200),
and press it in all the way until it clicks.
ffSecurely tighten the air filter cover fixing screw (x 1) using a Phillips screwdriver.
ENGLISH - 201
Resetting the filter counter
1) Turn on the power of the projector.
2) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER RESET], and press the <ENTER> button.
8) The confirmation screen is displayed, so pressqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffDisplay of [FILTER COUNTER] will change to [0 H].
Attention
ff After washing the air filter unit, dry it thoroughly before attaching it back to the projector. Attaching a wet unit will cause an electric shock or
malfunction.
ff Do not disassemble the air filter unit.
ff Make sure that the air filter unit is properly attached before using the projector. If it is not attached, the projector will suck in dirt and dust
causing a malfunction.
ff Do not insert object from the hole of the air intake port. Doing so may cause damage.
Note
ff When the projector is used without resetting the filter counter, the actual filter runtime (counter numeric value) will not be able to be
confirmed.
ff When the projector is used without attaching the air filter unit, the filter indicator <FILTER> will blink in red, and a message is displayed on
the projected image for approximately 30 seconds.
ff When the air filter unit is damaged or dirt does not come off even if it is washed, replace with the new optional Replacement Filter Unit
(Model No.: ET‑RFM100).
ff Replacement to a new air filter unit is recommended after washing it twice.
ff The dust-proof properties may be reduced after each cleaning.
ff The replacement cycle of the air filter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment.
Replacing the unit
Air filter unit

Air filter unit should be replaced if the dirt does not come off after cleaning.
The Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET‑RFM100) is an optional accessory. To purchase the product, consult
your dealer.
202 - ENGLISH
Air filter unit replacement procedure
Attention
ff Make sure to turn off the projector before replacing the filter.
ff When attaching the air filter unit, make sure to secure the stability of the projector, and execute in a safe location even if the air filter unit
falls accidentally.
1) Remove the air filter unit.

ffRefer to “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 200).
2) Attach the optional Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET‑RFM100) to the projector.
ffThe air filter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position
of the air filter unit with the grooves on the projector body.
ffRefer to “Attaching the air filter unit” (x page 201).
Attention
ff When switching on the projector, make sure that the air filter unit is attached. If it is not attached, the projector will suck in dirt and dust
causing a malfunction.
ff When the projector is used without attaching the air filter unit, the filter indicator <FILTER> will blink in red, and a message is displayed on
the projected image for approximately 30 seconds.
Note
ff The replacement cycle of the air filter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment.
ENGLISH - 203
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.
Problems Points to be checked Page
ff Is the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet? ―
ff Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>? 66
ff Is the wall outlet supplying electricity? ―
Power does not turn on.
ff Have the circuit breakers tripped? ―
ff Is the light source indicator <LIGHT> blinking? 198
ff Is the temperature indicator <TEMP> lit or blinking? 199
ff Are connections to external devices correctly performed? 52
ff Is the input selection setting correct? 67
ff Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum? 85
No image appears.
ff Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly? ―
ff Is the shutter function in use? 72, 110
ff If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is blinking in red, consult your dealer. ―
ff Is the lens focus set correctly? 68
ff Is the projection distance appropriate? 38
Image is fuzzy.
ff Is the lens dirty? 26
ff Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen? ―
ff Are [COLOR] and [TINT] adjusted correctly? 86
Color is pale or grayish. ff Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly? 52
ff Is the computer cable damaged? ―
ff Is the external device connected correctly to the audio input terminal? 33
ff Is the volume set to minimum? 73, 123
ff Is the mute function used? 72, 124
Audio is not output.
ff Is [AUDIO IN SELECT] in [AUDIO SETTING] correctly set? 124
ff Is there a cable connected to the <VARIABLE AUDIO OUT> terminal? Audio is not
53, 124
output from the built-in speaker when a cable is connected.
ff Are the batteries depleted? ―
ff Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly? 34
ff Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control
30
signal receiver of the projector?
Remote control does not
ff Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range? 30
respond.
ff Are other forms of light, such as fluorescent light, affecting the projection? 30
ff Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
138
[DISABLE]?
ff Is the ID number setting operation correct? 77
Menu screen does not
ff Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)? 73
appear.
Buttons on the control ff Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
138
panel do not operate. [DISABLE]?
ff Is [SYSTEM SELECTOR] set properly? 89
Image does not display
ff Is there a problem with the video tape or other image sources? ―
correctly.
ff Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 220
ff Is the cable too long? (For D‑Sub cables, the cable length should be 10 m (32'10")
―
or shorter.)
Image from a computer ff Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external
does not appear. output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” keys or the “Fn” + “F10”
―
keys simultaneously. This will differ depending on the model of the computer. Refer
to the user manual provided with your computer.)
Video from HDMI ff Is the HDMI cable connected securely? 52
compatible device does ff Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on. ―
not appear or it appears
jumbled. ff Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 220
No audio is coming from
the HDMI compatible ff Set the audio for connected device to linear PCM. ―
device.
204 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Troubleshooting
Problems Points to be checked Page

ff Is the cable compatible to the condition of the projector used? 55
ff Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external
―
The DIGITAL LINK input device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?
image is not displayed. ff Is [DIGITAL LINK MODE] set to [AUTO] or [DIGITAL LINK]? Is it set to
140
[ETHERNET]?
ff Is a signal which is not compatible with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter being input? ―
ff When [LIGHT POWER] in [ECO MANAGEMENT] is set to anything other than
114
Light ID cannot be [NORMAL], the [LightID] setting is disabled, and it will be fixed to [OFF].
received. ff Depending on the surrounding environment such as distance or brightness,
24
receiving of the Light ID signal may become difficult.
If the temperature inside the projector becomes high, the speed of the internal cooling
fan increases automatically and the operation noise becomes loud. If the internal 198
Operation noise became temperature reaches the abnormal value, the indicators will light up or blink.
loud. ff Is the ambient temperature high? 21
ff Is the air filter unit dirty? 200
ff Is the air intake/exhaust port blocked? 22
Attention
ff If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.
ENGLISH - 205
Chapter 6 Maintenance — FAQ
FAQ
Refer to this section when there is a problem with the wireless LAN connection or connection with the mirroring
function (noted as “mirroring connection” hereafter).
Wireless LAN connection
rrWireless LAN connection cannot be established.

ffIs the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] set to [DISABLE]?
ffConfirm the settings of the device.
ffIs there an obstacle between the device and the projector? Or, is the device too far away from the projector?
ffSet the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] to [DISABLE] once, and then perform the wireless LAN
connection operation again. Restoration process of the built-in Wireless Module is performed, which may enable
the connection.
rrImage of the Panasonic APPLICATION input is disrupted.

ffUnder certain reception conditions, the image may be disrupted. In such a case, try the following.
ggMove the device to perform wireless LAN connection closer to the projector.
ggInstall the projector away from other device that emits electromagnetic radiation, such as microwave oven,
gaming device, etc. If it does not improve, refrain from using other devices that emit electromagnetic radiation.
ggThe bandwidth of the wireless may not be sufficient when multiple wireless LAN devices are connected to a
single router. Turn off the devices which are not used or refrain from using other devices.
ggWhere possible, try not use the projector in a location where excessive static electricity or noise is generated.
Mirroring connection
rrMirroring connection is not established.

ffIs the input set to MIRRORING?
ffIs the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] set to [DISABLE]?
ffConfirm the settings of the device.
ffIs there an obstacle between the device and the projector? Or, is the device too far away from the projector?
ffConnection may not be established correctly right after the device has restored from the sleep status, or right
after switching the logon user. Turn the wireless LAN of the device off once and then on again, or restart the
device.
rrThe connection is disconnected and the image is not updating.

ffTry the following when the mirroring connection is disconnected.
ggWith the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY MODE] set to [ECO], turn the
power of the projector off once and then back on.
ggAfter turning off the projector, reconnect the plug of the power cord to the outlet.
ggRestart the device.
rrImage of the MIRRORING input is disrupted.

ffUnder certain reception conditions, the image may be disrupted. In such a case, try the following.
ggMove the device to perform wireless LAN connection closer to the projector.
ggInstall the projector away from other device that emits electromagnetic radiation, such as microwave oven,
gaming device, etc. If it does not improve, refrain from using other devices that emit electromagnetic radiation.
ggThe bandwidth of the wireless may not be sufficient when multiple wireless LAN devices are connected to a
single router. Turn off the devices which are not used or refrain from using other devices.
ggWhere possible, try not use the projector in a location where excessive static electricity or noise is generated.
ggWhen the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [USER], it may improve when setting is
changed to [SIMPLE] or [M-DIRECT]. End the mirroring connection once, and re-connect.
206 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance — FAQ
ggIt may improve by ending the mirroring connection once, and then change to a different channel in the
[NETWORK/USB] menu → [MIRRORING] → [CHANNEL]. End the mirroring connection once, and re-
connect.
ffConfirm that there is no problem with the used contents.
ffIt may be caused by the processing performance or the wireless transfer performance of the device in use.
Confirm the specification of the device.
rrThe connection was disconnected when not doing anything after performing the mirroring
connection.
ffDepending on the device in use, it may be set to disconnect the connection after specific time has elapsed.
Confirm the energy saving setting, etc., of the device.
ffIt may improve by updating the firmware of the device in use or the driver of the wireless LAN. Consult with the
customer support for the device.
rrOther
ffDepending on the device in use, confirmation screen for reconnection with the connection name of “from
UNKNOWN” may display, but reconnection cannot be performed from that screen.
ffDepending on the device in use, it may be requested to “delete the device” at the time of connection. In such
case, delete the device following the instruction of the device.
ENGLISH - 207
Chapter 6 Maintenance — [SELF TEST] display
[SELF TEST] display

[SELF TEST] can be checked in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] → [SELF TEST].
The following list shows the alphanumeric symbol that is displayed when an error or a warning has occurred and
its details. Confirm “Action number”, and follow the measure in “Measure for error and warning” (x page 209).
Error/warning display Details Action number
U04 Filter clogging warning 6
U11 Intake temperature warning 1
U13 Exhaust air temperature warning 1
U16 Light source temperature 1 warning 1
U18 Light source temperature 2 warning 1
U21 Intake temperature error 1
U23 Exhaust air temperature error 1
U25 Light source temperature 1 error 1
U27 Light source temperature 2 error 1
U76 Filter not attached warning 6
U78 Filter clogging error 6
U84 <DC OUT> terminal power supply error 4
H01 Battery replacement for the internal clock 3
H11 Intake air temperature sensor error 4
H13 Exhaust air temperature sensor error 4
H14 Light source temperature sensor 1 error 4
H16 Light source temperature sensor 2 error 4
F16 Angle sensor error 4
F18 Air pressure sensor error 4
F50 Power source intake fan warning 4
F51 Power source exhaust fan warning 4
F52 LCD panel red fan warning 4
F53 LCD panel green fan warning 4
F54 LCD panel blue fan warning 4
F55 PBS fan warning 4
F56 Phosphor wheel fan warning 4
F57 Light source fan warning 4
F58 Backup fan warning 4
F61 Light source driver communication error 4
F90 FPGA configuration error 4
F96 Lens mounter operation error 4
FE1 Power supply intake fan error 4
FE2 Power supply exhaust fan error 4
FE3 LCD panel red fan error 4
FE4 LCD panel green fan error 4
FE5 LCD panel blue fan error 4
FE6 PBS fan error 4
FE7 Phosphor wheel fan error 4
FE8 Light source fan error 4
FE9 Backup fan error 4
FH0 PW ERROR (FM/SUB) 4
FH1 Phosphor wheel error 4
FL1 Light source unit error 5
FL5 Light source bank 1 warning 4
Note
ff The self-diagnosis display and the details of the malfunction may be different.
ff For errors and warnings that are not described in the table, consult your dealer.
208 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance — [SELF TEST] display
rrMeasure for error and warning
Action
Measure
number
1 The operating environment temperature is too high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1.
2 The operating environment temperature is too low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1.
3 Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
4 If the display does not clear after switching the main power off and on, consult your dealer.
The light source has failed to turn on. If the light source does not light up after turning the power off and on, consult your
5
dealer.
6 Perform maintenance or replacement of the filter. (x page 200)
*1 For the operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating environment temperature” (x page 223).
ENGLISH - 209
Chapter 7 Appendix
This chapter describes specifications and after-sales service for the projector.
210 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7 Appendix — Technical information
Technical information
PJLink protocol
The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1 and class 2, and setting of the projector or
querying of the projector status can be performed from the computer using the PJLink protocol.
Control commands
The following table lists the PJLink protocol commands that can be used to control the projector.
ffx characters in tables are non-specific characters.
Parameter/response
Class Command Control details Remark
string
0 Standby
1 POWR Power supply control
1 Power on
0 Standby
Power supply status
1 POWR? 1 Power on
query
2 Preparing for switching off the projector
11 RGB1
INPT Input selection 12 RGB2
21 VIDEO
31 HDMI1
1, 2 32 HDMI2
33 DIGITAL LINK
INPT? Input selection query
41 MEMORY VIEWER
51 Panasonic APPLICATION
52 MIRRORING
10 Shutter function disabled (shutter: open), mute function disabled
Shutter control/audio
AVMT 11 Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed), mute function disabled
output control
20 Shutter function disabled (shutter: open), mute function disabled
1 Shutter function disabled (shutter: open), mute function enabled

21
Shutter status query/ (muted)
AVMT? audio output status 30 Shutter function disabled (shutter: open), mute function disabled
query Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed), mute function enabled
31
(muted)
Indicates fan errors, and returns ff 0 = No error is
1st byte
0 or 2. detected
Indicates light source errors, and ff 1 = Warning
2nd byte
returns 0 or 2. ff 2 = Error
Indicates temperature errors, and
1 ERST? Error status query xxxxxx 3rd byte
returns 0 - 2.
4th byte Returns 0.
5th byte Returns 0.
Indicates other errors, and
6th byte
returns 0 - 2.
Light source status AAAA: Light source runtime
1 LAMP? AAAA X
query X: 0 = Light source off, 1 = Light source on
11 12 21 31 32 33 41
1, 2 INST? Input selection list query ―
51 52
Returns the name set tin the [NETWORK/USB] menu →
1 NAME? Projector name query xxxxx
[PROJECTOR NAME].
Manufacturer name
1 INF1? Panasonic Returns manufacturer name.
query
PT‑MZ770
1 INF2? Model name query Returns model name.
PT‑MW730
Other information
1 INF0? xxxxx Returns information such as version number.
queries
1 CLSS? Class information query 2 Returns class for PJLink.
2 SNUM ? Serial number query xxxxxxxxx Returns serial number.
2 SVER ? Software version query xxxxxxxxx Returns version number.
ENGLISH - 211
Parameter/response
Class Command Control details Remark
string
11 / RGB1
12 / RGB2
21 / VIDEO
31 / HDMI1
Input terminal name 32 / HDMI2
2 INNM ? Returns input terminal name.
query 33 / DIGITAL LINK
41 / MEMORY VIEWER
51 / PANASONIC
APPLICATION
52 / MIRRORING
Input signal resolution AAAA: Horizontal resolution
2 IRES ? AAAAxBBBB
query BBBB: Vertical resolution
Recommended 1920x1200 Only for PT‑MZ770
2 RRES ?
resolution query 1280 x 800 Only for PT‑MW730
2 FILT ? Filter runtime inquiry xxxxx Returns the runtime of the filter.
Filter replacement model
2 RFIL ? ET‑RFM100 Returns the filter replacement model number.
number inquiry
0 Increases the volume.
2 SVOL Speaker volume
1 Decreases the volume.
FREZ Freeze control 0 Freeze function cancel
2
FREZ ? Freeze status query 1 Freeze function (stop)
Notifies the MAC address when the PJLink communication
2 LKUP Link up notification xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
becomes possible.
The projector connected to the same network that can
2 SRCH Projector search ACKN=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
communicate with PJLink will respond with its MAC address.
PJLink security authentication

The password used for PJLink is the same as that of the password set for web control.
When using the projector without security authentication, do not set a password for web control.
ffFor specifications related to PJLink, visit the website of Japan Business Machine and Information System
Industries Association.
URL http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
Control commands via LAN
When web control administrator rights password is set (Protect mode)
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
ffYou can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address Obtain from the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].
Port number Obtain from the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].
2) Check the response from the projector.
Termination
Data section Blank Mode Blank Random number section
symbol
Command “NTCONTROL” ‘’ ‘1’ ‘’ “zzzzzzzz” (CR)
example (ASCII string) 0x20 0x31 0x20 (ASCII code hex number) 0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 1 byte
ffMode: 1 = Protect mode

ffExample: Response during protect mode (random number section is undefined value)
“NTCONTROL 1 23181e1e” (CR)
212 - ENGLISH
3) Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.
ff“xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz”
xxxxxx Administrator rights user name for the web control (default user name is “dispadmin”)
yyyyy Password of above administrator rights user (default password is “@Panasonic”)
zzzzzzzz 8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)
Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.
rrTransmitted data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
Command Hash value ‘0’ ‘0’ Control command (CR)
example “Connecting” (x page 212) 0x30 0x30 (ASCII string) 0x0d
Data length 32 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte
ffExample: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command (hash value is calculated from default user
name, password, and acquired random number)
“dbdd2dabd3d4d68c5dd970ec0c29fa6400QPW” (CR)
rrReceived data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
Command ‘0’ ‘0’ Control command (CR)
example 0x30 0x30 (ASCII string) 0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte
ffExample: The projector is powered on

“00001” (CR)
rrError response
Termination
String Details
symbol
“ERR1” Undefined control command
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period (CR)
Message
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period 0x0d
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
Data length 4 bytes ― 1 byte
When web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
ffYou can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address Obtain from the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].
Port number Obtain from the [NETWORK/USB] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].
2) Check the response from the projector.
ENGLISH - 213
Termination
Data section Blank Mode
symbol
Command “NTCONTROL” ‘’ ‘0’ (CR)
example (ASCII string) 0x20 0x30 0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
ffMode: 0 = Non-protect mode

ffExample: Response during non-protect mode
“NTCONTROL 0” (CR)
Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.
rrTransmitted data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
ffExample: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command

“00QPW” (CR)
rrReceived data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
ffExample: The power of the projector is in standby status

“00000” (CR)
rrError response
Termination
String Details
symbol
“ERR1” Undefined control command
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period (CR)
Message
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period 0x0d
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
Data length 4 bytes ― 1 byte
214 - ENGLISH
Communication flow between the server and the client

When sending / receiving commands via LAN, refer to the communication flow shown below.
Server: the projector
Client: the control device such as a computer
Client Server
Connection query
Sending key
Send first command
First session
Respond first command
Cut off
Connection query
Sending key
Send second command
Second session
Respond second command
Cut off
<SERIAL IN> terminal

The <SERIAL IN> terminal of the projector conforms with RS‑232C so that the projector can be connected to and
controlled from a computer.
Connection
When connecting directly
Projector connecting terminals
D-Sub 9p (female) Computer
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cable (straight)
When connecting using DIGITAL LINK compatible device

Projector connecting terminals DIGITAL LINK compatible device
Computer
DIGITAL LINK DIGITAL LINK D-Sub 9p (female)
D-Sub 9p (male)
LAN cable (straight) Communication cable (straight)
Note
ff The destination of [RS-232C] (x page 120) must be set according to the connection method.
ff When connecting using a DIGITAL LINK compatible device, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [ECO MANAGEMENT] → [STANDBY
MODE] to [NORMAL] to control the projector in the standby mode.
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the projector cannot be control during standby.
ENGLISH - 215
Pin assignments and signal names
D‑Sub 9-pin (female)

Pin No. Signal name Details
Outside view
(1) ― NC
(6) (9) (2) TXD Transmitted data
(3) RXD Received data
(4) ― NC
(5) GND Earth
(6) ― NC
(7) CTS
Connected internally
(1) (5) (8) RTS
(9) ― NC
Communication conditions (Factory default)
Signal level RS‑232C-compliant

Sync. method Asynchronous
Baud rate 9 600 bps
Parity None
Character length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
X parameter None
S parameter None
Basic format
Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this
order. Add parameters according to the details of control.
ID designate
ZZ, 01 to 64
(2 bytes)
End (1 byte)
Parameter (undefined length)
Colon (1 byte)
3 command characters (3 bytes)
Semi-colon (1 byte)
2 ID characters (2 bytes)
Start (1 byte)
Basic format (has subcommands)
Same as the basic format
Sub command (5 bytes) Parameter (6 bytes)*1

Symbol “+” or “–” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5
bytes)
Operation (1 byte)*1
“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)
216 - ENGLISH
*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary.
Attention
ff If a command is sent after the light source starts lighting, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try
sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.
ff When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before
sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.
Note
ff If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
ff If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
ff ID transmission in RS‑232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64.
ff If a command is sent with an ID designated, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.
gg It matches the projector ID
gg When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID] is set to [ALL] on the projector
ff STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.
Cable specification
When connected to a computer
1 NC NC 1
2 2
3 3
Projector Computer
4 NC NC 4
(<SERIAL IN> terminal) (DTE specifications)
5 5
6 NC NC 6
7 7
8 8
9 NC NC 9
Control command
The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.
rrProjector control command
Parameter/response
Command Details Remark (parameter)
string
PON Power on
― To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.
POF Power standby
000 STANDBY
QPW Power query
001 Power on
VID VIDEO
RG1 RGB1
RG2 RGB2
HD1 HDMI1
Switching the input
IIS HD2 HDMI2
signal
DL1 DIGITAL LINK
PA1 Panasonic APPLICATION
MC1 MIRRORING
MV1 MEMORY VIEWER
OSH Shutter control 0 OPEN
QSH Shutter status query 1 CLOSE
0 NORMAL/VID AUTO
1 4:3
VSE Aspect ratio switch
2 WIDE
5 NATIVE
6 FULL
Aspect ratio settings
QSE 9 H FIT
query
10 V FIT
ENGLISH - 217
Parameter/response
Command Details Remark (parameter)
string
OCS Sub memory switch
Sub memory status 01 - 96 Sub memory number
QSB
query
218 - ENGLISH
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal

The projector can be remotely controlled (contact control) by the control board that is located far away form the
projector where the signal from the remote control does not reach.
Use the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control board.
Remote control Contact control
Remote control/contact control
Standby Lit
Light source
RGB1 HDMI1
RGB2 HDMI2
VIDEO
Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc. Remote control board in another location
Pin assignments and signal names
D‑Sub 9-pin
Pin No. Signal name Open (H) Short (L)
Outside view
(1) GND ― GND
(2) POWER OFF ON
(6) (9)
(3) RGB1 Other RGB1
(4) RGB2 Other RGB2
(5) VIDEO Other VIDEO
(6) HDMI1 Other HDMI1
(7) HDMI2 Other HDMI2
(1) (5) (8) SHUTTER OFF ON
Controlled by remote Controlled by external
(9) RST/SET
control contact
Attention
ff When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).
ff When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for
RS‑232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.
gg Power <v/b> button, <SHUTTER> button
ff When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, and then any pins from (3) to (7) and the pin (1) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the
control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS‑232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also
disabled.
gg Power <v/b> button, <INPUT SELECT> button, <RGB1/2> button, <HDMI 1> button, <HDMI 2> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button,
<VIDEO> button, <NETWORK/USB> button, <SHUTTER> button
Note
ff Setting of the pin (2) to pin (8) can be changed when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [REMOTE1 MODE] is set to [USER].
(x page 122)
Operating [MENU LOCK PASSWORD]

To initialize your password, consult your distributor.
ENGLISH - 219
List of compatible signals

The following table specifies the video signals compatible with the projector.
This signal with l in the supported signal column is supported.
ffSymbols that indicate formats are as follows.
ggV: VIDEO
ggR: RGB
ggY: YCBCR/YPBPR
ggH: HDMI
ggDL: DIGITAL LINK
ffInput corresponding to each item in the plug and play column is as follows.
ggRGB: RGB2 input
ggHDMI: HDMI1/HDMI2 input
ggDIGITAL LINK: DIGITAL LINK input
Scanning freq. Dot Plug and play*1
Compatible Resolution clock
Horizontal Vertical Format HDMI DIGITAL LINK
signal (Dots) freq. RGB
(kHz) (Hz) (MHz) 4K/60P 4K/30P 2K 4K/60P 4K/30P 2K
NTSC/NTSC4.43/
720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 ― V ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
PAL‑M/PAL60
PAL/PAL‑N/
720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 ― V ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
SECAM
480/60i 720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 13.5 R/Y ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
576/50i 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 13.5 R/Y ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
720
480/60i 15.7 59.9 27.0 H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(1 440) x 480i*2
720
576/50i 15.6 50.0 27.0 H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(1 440) x 576i*2
480/60p 720 x 480 31.5 59.9 27.0 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
576/50p 720 x 576 31.3 50.0 27.0 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0*7 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0*7 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0*7 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0*7 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0*7 74.3 R/Y/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0*7 148.5 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 R/Y/H/DL ― l l l l l l
3840 x 2160/24p*6 3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0*7 297.0 H/DL l l l ― l l ―
3840 x 2160/25p*6 3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0 297.0 H/DL l l l ― l l ―
3840 x 2160/30p*6 3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0*7 297.0 H/DL l l l ― l l ―
3 840 x 2 160*8 135.0 60.0*7 297.0 H/DL l l ― ― l ― ―
3840 x 2160/60p*6
3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*7 594.0 H l l ― ― ― ― ―
3 840 x 2 160*8 112.5 50.0 297.0 H/DL l l ― ― l ― ―
3840 x 2160/50p*6
3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 594.0 H l l ― ― ― ― ―
4096 x 2160/24p*6 4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0*7 297.0 H/DL l l l ― l l ―
4096 x 2160/25p*6 4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0 297.0 H/DL l l l ― l l ―
4096 x 2160/30p*6 4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0*7 297.0 H/DL l l l ― l l ―
4 096 x 2 160*8 135.0 60.0*7 297.0 H/DL l l ― ― l ― ―
4096 x 2160/60p*6
4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*7 594.0 H l l ― ― ― ― ―
4 096 x 2 160*8 112.5 50.0 297.0 H/DL l l ― ― l ― ―
4096 x 2160/50p*6
4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 594.0 H l l ― ― ― ― ―
640 x 400/70 640 x 400 31.5 70.1 25.2 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
640 x 400/85 640 x 400 37.9 85.1 31.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
640 x 480/60 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
640 x 480/67 640 x 480 35.0 66.7 30.2 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
220 - ENGLISH

640 x 480/73 640 x 480 37.9 72.8 31.5 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
640 x 480/75 640 x 480 37.5 75.0 31.5 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
640 x 480/85 640 x 480 43.3 85.0 36.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
800 x 600/56 800 x 600 35.2 56.3 36.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
800 x 600/60 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
800 x 600/72 800 x 600 48.1 72.2 50.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
800 x 600/75 800 x 600 46.9 75.0 49.5 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
800 x 600/85 800 x 600 53.7 85.1 56.3 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
832 x 624/75 832 x 624 49.7 74.6 57.3 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/50 1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1024 x 768/60 1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/70 1 024 x 768 56.5 70.1 75.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/75 1 024 x 768 60.0 75.0 78.8 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/82 1 024 x 768 65.5 81.6 86.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1024 x 768/85 1 024 x 768 68.7 85.0 94.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1024 x 768/100 1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 864/60 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 864/75 1 152 x 864 67.5 75.0 108.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 864/85 1 152 x 864 77.1 85.0 119.7 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 870/75 1 152 x 870 68.7 75.1 100.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
1280 x 720/50 1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 720/60 1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/50 1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 768 47.7 60.0 80.1 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/60
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/75 1 280 x 768 60.3 74.9 102.3 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/85 1 280 x 768 68.6 84.8 117.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800/50 1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800/60 1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5 R/H/DL l*3 l*3 l*3 l*3 l*3 l*3 l*3
1280 x 800/75 1 280 x 800 62.8 74.9 106.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800/85 1 280 x 800 71.6 84.9 122.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 960/60 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/50 1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50 88.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/60 1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/75 1 280 x 1 024 80.0 75.0 135.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
1280 x 1024/85 1 280 x 1 024 91.1 85.0 157.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1366 x 768/50 1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1366 x 768/60 1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1400 x 1050/50 1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50 99.9 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1400 x 1050/60
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1400 x 1050/75 1 400 x 1 050 82.2 75.0 155.9 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1440 x 900/50 1 440 x 900 46.3 50.0 87.4 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1440 x 900/60 1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1600 x 900/50 1 600 x 900 46.4 49.9 96.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1600 x 900/60 1 600 x 900 55.9 60.0 119.0 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1600 x 1200/50 1 600 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 131.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1600 x 1200/60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0 R/H/DL l l l l l l l
1680 x 1050/50 1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1680 x 1050/60 1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1080/50 1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 920 x 1 080*4 66.6 59.9 138.5 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1080/60
1 920 x 1 080*5 67.2 60.0 173.0 R ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1200/50 1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3 R/H/DL ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
ENGLISH - 221

1 920 x 1 200*4 74.0 60.0 154.0 R/H/DL l*6 l*6 l*6 l*6 l*6 l*6 l*6
1920 x 1200/60
1 920 x 1 200*5 74.6 59.9 193.3 R ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
*1 Signal with l in the plug and play column is a signal described in the EDID (extended display identification data) of the projector. The signal that
does not have l in the plug and play column can also be input if it is described in the format column. The resolution may not be selected in the
computer even if the projector is compatible for the signal that does not have l in the plug and play column.
*2 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only
*3 Only for PT‑MW730
*4 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
*5 Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image.
*6 Only for PT‑MZ770
*7 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.
*8 YPBPR 4:2:0 format only
Note
ff A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots. The number of display dots is as follows.
gg PT‑MZ770: 1 920 x 1 200
gg PT‑MW730: 1 280 x 800
ff The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
ff When interlaced signals are connected, flickering may occur on the projected image.
ff Even if it is the signal listed in the list of compatible signals, it may not be displayed by the projector if the video signal is recorded in a
special format.
222 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7 Appendix — Specifications
Specifications
The specifications of the projector are as follows.
Power supply 100 V - 240 V ~ (100 V - 240 V alternating current), 50 Hz/60 Hz

PT‑MZ770 570 W (6.4 A - 2.7 A)
Power consumption
PT‑MW730 545 W (6.1 A - 2.6 A)
Approx. 0.5 W When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO]
Approx. 22 W When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
When [IN STANDBY MODE] in [AUDIO SETTING] is set to [ON],
Power consumption (during Approx. 47 W maximum audio is output, and USB memory is inserted in the
standby) <VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal
When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], [IN STANDBY MODE] in
Approx. 115 W [AUDIO SETTING] is set to [ON], maximum audio is output, and the
power is supplied from the <DC OUT> terminal
Size 19.3 mm (0.76") (aspect ratio 16:10)
Display system Translucent screen LCD panel 3 panels, 3 primary colors system
LCD panel Drive system Active matrix
PT‑MZ770 2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)
Number of pixels
PT‑MW730 1 024 000 pixels (1 280 x 800 dots)
Electric zoom 1.6 to 2.8:1
Lens*1 F = 1.7 to 2.3
Electric focus
f = 26.8 mm to 45.5 mm
Light source Laser
Light output*2*3 8 000 lm (when [LIGHT POWER] in [ECO MANAGEMENT] is set to [NORMAL])
Contrast ratio*2 3 000 000:1 (when [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [1] or [2])
Color system 7 standards (NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL‑N/PAL‑M/SECAM/PAL60)
Projected image size 1.02 m (40") to 10.16 m (400")*4
Image aspect ratio 16:10
Projection method [FRONT/REAR]/[FLOOR/CEILING]
Speaker 4.0 cm, round x 1
Audio maximum useful output
10 W (monaural)
power
Power cord length 3.0 m (118-1/8")
Outer case Molded plastic
Black model Black (PT‑MZ770LB only)
Outer color
White model White (except for PT‑MZ770LB)
Width 560 mm (22-1/16")
Height 205 mm (8-1/16") (with the feet at shortest position)
PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770D,
Dimensions PT‑MZ770A, PT‑MW730, 443 mm (17-7/16") (including standard zoom lens)
PT‑MW730D, PT‑MW730A
Depth
PT‑MZ770L, PT‑MZ770LA,
PT‑MZ770LB, PT‑MW730L, 428 mm (16-27/32") (excluding the optional lens)
PT‑MW730LA
PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770D,
PT‑MZ770A, PT‑MW730, Approx. 17.1 k] (37.7 lbs.)*5 (including standard zoom lens)
PT‑MW730D, PT‑MW730A
Weight
PT‑MZ770L, PT‑MZ770LA,
PT‑MZ770LB, PT‑MW730L, Approx. 16.2 k] (35.7 lbs.)*5 (excluding the optional lens)
PT‑MW730LA
When [LIGHT POWER] in [ECO MANAGEMENT] is set to [NORMAL]
35 dB
Noise level*2 or [ECO].
28 dB When [LIGHT POWER] in [ECO MANAGEMENT] is set to [QUIET]
Operating
environment 0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F)*6
Operating temperature
environment Operating
environment 20 % to 80 % (no condensation)
humidity
ENGLISH - 223
Power supply DC 3 V (AAA/R03/LR03 battery x 2)

Remote Operating range Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)
control Weight 102 ] (3.6 ozs.) (including batteries)
Dimensions Width: 48 mm (1-7/8"), Height: 145 mm (5-23/32"), Depth: 27 mm (1-1/16")
*1 The lens for PT‑MZ770L, PT‑MZ770LB, PT‑MZ770LA, PT‑MW730L and PT‑MW730LA is sold separately.
*2 Measurement, measuring conditions, and method of notation all comply with ISO/IEC 21118:2012 international standards.
*3 Value is for the supplied standard zoom lens. The value varies depending on the lens.
*4 When the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑ELW22) is used, the projected image size is 1.524 m (60") to 10.160 m (400").
*5 Average value. Weight varies for each product.
*6 The projector cannot be used at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
The light output may decrease to protect the projector when the operating environment temperature exceeds 36 °C (96.8 °F).
Note
ff The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
rrConnecting terminal
1 set, BNC x 5 (RGB/YPBPR/YCBCR) x 1

RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
<RGB 1 IN> terminal polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
YPBPR signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, PBPR: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
1 set, high-density D‑Sub 15 p (female)
SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
<RGB 2 IN> terminal polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
1 set, high-density D‑Sub 15 p (female)
<MONITOR OUT> terminal SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, positive/negative polarity
VD TTL high impedance, positive/negative polarity
<HDMI 1 IN> terminal Total 2 sets, HDMI 19 p, HDCP compatible*1, Deep Color compatible
<HDMI 2 IN> terminal Audio signal Linear PCM (sampling frequency: 48 kHz/44.1 kHz/32 kHz)
<VIDEO IN> terminal 1 set, pin jack, 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<AUDIO IN 1> terminal
Total 2 sets, M3 stereo mini jack, 0.5 V [rms], input impedance 22 kΩ or more
<AUDIO IN 2> terminal
<AUDIO IN 3> terminal 1 set, pin jack x 2 (L-R), 0.5 V [rms], input impedance 22 kΩ or more
<VARIABLE AUDIO OUT> 1 set, M3 stereo mini jack (monitor output, stereo compatible), 0 V [rms] to 2.0 V [rms] (variable), output
terminal impedance 2.2 kΩ or lower
<SERIAL IN> terminal D‑Sub 9 p, 1 set, RS‑232C compliant, for computer control
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal 1 set, D‑Sub 9 p, for contact control
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal 1 set, M3 stereo mini jack, for remote control (wired)
1 set, RJ‑45, for network and DIGITAL LINK connections (HDBaseTTM compliant), PJLink compatible,
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal
100Base‑TX, HDCP compatible*1, Deep Color compatible
<LAN> terminal 1 set, RJ‑45, for network connection, PJLink compatible, 10Base‑T/100Base‑TX
<VIEWER/PAIRING> terminal 1 set, USB connector (type A), for Memory Viewer function/pairing function
<DC OUT> terminal USB connector (type A) x 1, for power supply (DC 5 V, maximum 2 A)
*1 PT-MZ770: HDCP 2.2 compatible; PT-MW730: HDCP compatible
rrWireless LAN
No.: ET‑WM300).
Compliance standards IEEE802.11a/b/g/n
Transmission method DSSS, OFDM
Modulation method DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK, BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, MIMO
224 - ENGLISH
IEEE802.11b Maximum 11 Mbps

Transmission speed IEEE802.11g/a Maximum 54 Mbps
IEEE802.11n Maximum 300 Mbps
Communication distance Approx. 30 m (98'5") (depending on the operating environment)
When MIRRORING input is selected
PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770L, IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz
PT‑MZ770LB, PT‑MW730,
PT‑MW730L IEEE802.11a/n 5.180 GHz - 5.240 GHz (W52)
IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz

PT‑MZ770A, PT‑MZ770LA,
PT‑MW730A, PT‑MW730LA 5.745 GHz - 5.805 GHz (W58: excluding ch
IEEE802.11a/n
165 )
IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz
PT‑MZ770D, PT‑MW730D 5.180 GHz - 5.240 GHz (W52)

IEEE802.11a/n 5.745 GHz - 5.805 GHz (W58: excluding ch
165)
When [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [SIMPLE]
All models IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz
When [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [M-DIRECT]
PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770L, IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz
IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz

Frequency band (center PT‑MW730A, PT‑MW730LA 5.745 GHz - 5.805 GHz (W58: excluding ch
IEEE802.11a/n
frequency) 165)
IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.472 GHz
IEEE802.11a/n
5.745 GHz - 5.825 GHz (W58)
When [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [USER]
IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz
PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770L,
PT‑MZ770LB, PT‑MW730, 5.180 GHz - 5.240 GHz (W52)
5.660 GHz - 5.700 GHz
IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.462 GHz
5.745 - 5.805 GHz (W58: excluding ch 165)
ff for Taiwan
PT‑MW730A, PT‑MW730LA 5.280 GHz - 5.320 GHz (W53: excluding
IEEE802.11a/n
ch 52)
5.745 GHz - 5.805 GHz (W58: excluding
ch 165)
IEEE802.11b/g/n 2.412 GHz - 2.472 GHz

IEEE802.11a/n 5.260 GHz - 5.320 GHz (W53)
5.745 GHz - 5.825 GHz (W58)
ENGLISH - 225
When MIRRORING input is selected

PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770L, IEEE802.11b/g/n Channels 1 to 11
PT‑MW730L IEEE802.11a/n Channels 36/40/44/48 (W52)
IEEE802.11b/g/n Channels 1 to 11
PT‑MW730A, PT‑MW730LA Channels 149/153/157/161 (W58: excluding
IEEE802.11a/n
ch 165)
PT‑MZ770D, PT‑MW730D Channels 36/40/44/48 (W52)

IEEE802.11a/n Channels 149/153/157/161 (W58: excluding
ch 165)
When [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [SIMPLE]
All models IEEE802.11b/g/n Channels 1/6/11
When [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [M-DIRECT]
PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770L, IEEE802.11b/g/n Channels 1 to 11
PT‑MW730A, PT‑MW730LA Channels 149/153/157/161 (W58: excluding
Channels used IEEE802.11a/n
ch 165)
IEEE802.11a/n
Channels 149/153/157/161/165 (W58)
When [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [USER]
PT‑MZ770, PT‑MZ770L,
PT‑MZ770LB, PT‑MW730, Channels 36/40/44/48 (W52)
Channels 132/136/140 (part of W56)
Channels 149/153/157/161 (W58: excluding
ch 165)
ff for Taiwan
PT‑MW730A, PT‑MW730LA IEEE802.11a/n
Channels 56/60/64 (W53: excluding ch 52)
Channels 149/153/157/161 (W58: excluding
ch 165)

IEEE802.11a/n Channels 52/56/60/64 (W53)
Channels 149/153/157/161/165 (W58)
When connected in infrastructure mode
Security 128 bits/64 bits WEP, WPA-PSK <TKIP/AES>, WPA2-PSK <TKIP/AES>, WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP <PEAP

(MS-CHAPv2)/PEAP (GTC)/EAP-TTLS (MD5) / EAP-TTLS (MS-CHAPv2)/EAP-FAST (MS-CHAPv2)/
EAP-FAST (GTC) /EAP-TLS>
226 - ENGLISH
rrCompatible signal
For details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”
(x page 220).
Video input
Horizontal: 15.73 kHz, Vertical: 59.94 Hz; Horizontal: 15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
RGB input
ff Resolution: 640 x 400 to 1 920 x 1 200
ff Dot clock frequency: 162 MHz or less
ff PIAS (Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning) system
YCBCR/YPBPR input
ff Resolution: 480i/576i to 1 920 x 1 080
ff Dot clock frequency: 148.5 MHz or less
ff The SYNC/HD and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC.
HDMI input
For PT-MZ770
ff Moving image signal resolution: 480i*1/576i*1 to 4 096 x 2 160
Still image signal resolution: 640 x 400 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlace)
ff Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 594 MHz
For PT-MW730
DIGITAL LINK input
For PT-MZ770
For PT-MW730
*1 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only
ENGLISH - 227
Chapter 7 Appendix — Dimensions
Dimensions
Unit: mm (inch)
428 (16-27/32")
15 (19/32")
280 (11-1/32")
87 (3-7/16")
107 (4-7/32")
185 (7-9/32")
205 (8-1/16")
20 (25/32")
235 (9-1/4") 326 (12-27/32")
470 (18-1/2")
560 (22-1/16")
* The above dimensions are obtained when the standard zoom lens is attached.
* Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product.
228 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7 Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket

ffWhen installing the projector to a ceiling, use the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High
Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)) together with Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKE301B
(Projector Mount Bracket)).
Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKE301B (Projector
Mount Bracket)
ffAttach the drop-prevention set that comes with the Ceiling Mount Bracket to the projector. If you need the drop-
prevention set (Service Model No.: DPPW1004ZA/X1) is necessary, consult your dealer.
ffWhen the projector is mounted to the existing Ceiling Mount Bracket (in combination with the Model No.:
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings) or ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), and the Model No.: ET‑PKE300B (Projector
Mount Bracket)), it is necessary to replace the drop-prevention wire rope with the one corresponding to this
projector. Consult your dealer.
ffAsk a qualified technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling.
ffPanasonic takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of the Ceiling Mount
Bracket not manufactured by Panasonic or the inappropriate choice of location for installing the Ceiling Mount
Bracket, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired.
ffUnused products must be removed promptly by a qualified technician.
ffUse a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specified tightening torques. Do not use
electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
ffRead the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket for details.
ffThe model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
rrSpecification for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)
Unit: mm (inch)
M6
12 (15/32")
Screw tightening torque: (M6) 4 ± 0.5 N·m
ENGLISH - 229
Chapter 7 Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
rrSpecification for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)
Unit: mm (inch)
45(1-25/32")
172(6-25/32")
190 (7-15/32")
180 (7-3/32")
223 (8-25/32")
69 (2-23/32")
100 (3-15/16")
354 (13-15/16")
371 (14-19/32")
476 (18-3/4")
230 - ENGLISH
Index
Index
A <FREEZE> button Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount
<AC IN> terminal 31, 58 Remote control 29, 73 Bracket 229
Accessories 27 Freeze function 73 Precautions for use 20
Adjusting adjustable feet 48 Function button 76 Projecting 67
[ADVANCED MENU] 82, 97 <FUNCTION> button [PROJECTION METHOD] 113
Air filter unit 200 Remote control 29, 76 Projector body 31
Application software 25 [FUNCTION BUTTON] 122 [PROJECTOR ID] 113
[ASPECT] 91 [PROJECTOR NAME] 146
<ASPECT> button G [PROJECTOR SETUP] 83, 113
Remote control 29, 76 [GAMMA] 87 Protecting the registered signal 134
Aspect function 76
[AUDIO SETTING] 123 H R
[AUTO SETUP] 101 <HDMI 1> button [RASTER POSITION] 98
<AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button Remote control 29, 67 Read this first! 5
Remote control 29, 74 <HDMI 2> button [REALTIME KEYSTONE] 93
[AUTO SIGNAL] 101 Remote control 29, 67 Registering new signals 133
Automatic setup function 74 [HDMI IN] 103 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal 219
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal 34
B I Remote control 29
[BACK COLOR] 109 <ID ALL> button Remote control operations 72
[BLANKING] 97 Remote control 29, 77 [REMOTE1 MODE] 122
[BRIGHTNESS] 85 <ID SET> button Removing/attaching the projection lens 49
Remote control 29, 77 Renaming the registered signal 133
C Initial setting 61 Replacing the air filter unit 202
Cautions on use 26 [INITIAL STARTUP] 117 Replacing the unit 202
Cautions when installing 20 [INITIALIZE] 131 Resetting to the factory default 81
Cautions when transporting 20 [INPUT RESOLUTION] 98 <RETURN> button
Ceiling Mount Bracket 229 <INPUT SELECT> button Remote control 29
[CLAMP POSITION] 98 Projector body 32, 68 [RGB IN] 102
[CLOCK PHASE] 93 Installation mode 36 <RGB1/2> button
[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] 108 Remote control 29, 67
[COLOR] 86 L [RS-232C] 120, 215
[COLOR ADJUSTMENT] 100 [LENS CALIBRATION] 122
[COLOR CORRECTION] 100 <LENS/CANCEL> button S
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] 86 Projector body 32, 68 [SAVE ALL USER DATA] 130
Connecting the power cord 58 Light source indicator 198 [SCHEDULE] 119
Connecting the remote control to the projector [LightID] 116 <SCREEN ADJ> button
with a cable 34 List of compatible signals 220 Remote control 29, 74
Connecting with the wireless LAN 157 [LOAD ALL USER DATA] 130 [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] 94
Connection 52 [SCREEN SETTING] 101
[CONTRAST] 85
M Security 23
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 139 Main menu 81 [SECURITY] 84, 136
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 138 Main power switch 31, 60 [SECURITY PASSWORD] 136
[Crestron Connected(TM)] 176 Maintenance 200 [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 136
[MEMORY VIEWER] 146 Selecting the input signal 67
D MEMORY VIEWER input 186 [SELF TEST] display 208
<D.ZOOM-> button <MENU> button <SERIAL IN> terminal 215
Remote control 29, 75 Projector body 32, 80 [SERVICE PASSWORD] 131
<D.ZOOM+> button Remote control 29, 80 Setting ID number of the remote control 77
Remote control 29, 75 Menu item 82 Setting up 36
[DATA CLONING] 127 [MENU LOCK] 137 [SHARPNESS] 88
[DATE AND TIME] 118 [MENU LOCK PASSWORD] 137 [SHIFT] 91
[DAYLIGHT VIEW] 88 [MIRRORING] 150 <SHIFT> button
[DC OUT] 126 MIRRORING input 182 Remote control 29, 68
<DEFAULT> button <MUTE> button <SHUTTER> button
Remote control 29, 81 Remote control 29, 72 Projector body 32
Deleting the registered signal 133 Remote control 29, 72
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] 97
N [SHUTTER SETTING] 110
DIGITAL LINK 25 Navigating through the menu 80 [SIGNAL LIST] 84, 133
<DIGITAL LINK> button Network connection 154 [SIGNAL SEARCH] 109
Remote control 29, 67 [NETWORK CONTROL] 146 Specifications 223
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 105 [NETWORK STATUS] 151 [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] 117
[DIGITAL LINK MENU] 141 [NETWORK/USB] 84, 140 [STARTUP LOGO] 110
[DIGITAL LINK MODE] 140 <NETWORK/USB> button [STATUS] 126
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS] 140 Remote control 29, 67 <STATUS> button
[DIGITAL ZOOM] 112 [NOISE REDUCTION] 88 Remote control 29, 77
Dimensions 228 Sub memory 135
Display language 83, 99
O Switching off the projector 66
[DISPLAY OPTION] 83, 100 <ON SCREEN> button Switching on the projector 60
[DISPLAY SETTING] 136 Remote control 29, 73 [SYSTEM SELECTOR] 89
Disposal 26 [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 106
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] 89 On-screen menu 80 T
Optional accessories 28 Temperature indicator 198
E [TEST PATTERN] 84, 132
<ECO> button
P <TEST PATTERN> button
Remote control 29, 77 [P-TIMER] 111 Remote control 29, 76
[ECO MANAGEMENT] 114 <P-TIMER> button [TEXT CHANGE] 137
<ENTER> button Remote control 29, 76 [TINT] 86
Projector body 32 Pairing function 195 Troubleshooting 204
Remote control 29, 80 [Panasonic APPLICATION] 148
Expanding signal lock-in range 134 Panasonic APPLICATION input 179 V
[PICTURE] 82, 85 <VIDEO> button
F [PICTURE MODE] 85 Remote control 29, 67
FAQ 206 [POSITION] 82, 91 <VOL->/<VOL+> button
[FILTER COUNTER] 125 Power button Projector body 32
Filter indicator 198 Projector body 32 Remote control 29, 73
<FOCUS> button Remote control 29 Volume adjustment 73
Remote control 29, 68 Power cord 58
[FREEZE]
112
ENGLISH - 231
Index
W
Web control 159
[WIRED LAN] 141
[WIRELESS LAN] 142
Wireless Module 51
Z
[ZOOM] 92
<ZOOM> button
Remote control
29, 68
232 - ENGLISH
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used
electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take
them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local municipality.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol)

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct
method of disposal.
Product Information (for Turkey only)

AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
Eski Ekipman ve Bataryaların İşlenmesi.
Sadece geri dönüşüm sistemleri olan Avrupa Birliği ve ülkeleri için geçerlidir.
Ürünler, ambalaj ve/veya ekli belgeler üzerindeki bu semboller kullanılmış elektrik ve elektronik
ürünlerin ve pillerin genel ev atığı ile karıştırılmaması gerektiğini ifade eder.
Eski ürünlerin ve pillerin toplanması ve geri kazanılması için bu atıkları lütfen yasayla belirlenmiş
olan uygun toplama merkezlerine teslim ediniz.
Bu atıkların doğru işlenmesiyle, değerli kaynakların korunmasına ve insan sağlığı ve çevreye
olası negatif etkilerinin engellenmesine yardımcı olabilirsiniz.
Atıkların toplanması ve geri dönüşümü için detaylı bilgi için lütfen bağlı olduğunuz yerel
yönetimlerle iletişime geçiniz.
Atıkların atılmasıyla ilgili yanlış uygulamalar yasayla belirlenmiş olan cezalara sebebiyet verebilir.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site : https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
© Panasonic Corporation 2018
Panasonic System Solutions Company of North America

Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102
TEL: (877) 803 - 8492
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3
TEL: (905) 624 - 5010
W0718JY0 -PT

Projector PT-MZ770 Series Operating Instructions English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Projector PT-MZ770 Series Operating Instructions English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Projector PT-MZ770 Series Operating Instructions English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

Model No. PT-MZ770

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

[PICTURE] menu  85 [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu  113

[NETWORK/USB] menu  140 Maintenance/replacement  200

Read this first!

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN

Indicated on the projector

DANGER-CLASS 4 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EYE OR

DPQT1359ZA (Inside of product)

Indicated on the projector

(for other countries or regions)

CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

WARNING (USA and Canada)

For USA-California Only

FCC NOTICE (USA)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

IMPORTANT: THE MOLDED PLUG

WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

Importer’s name and address within the European Union

Hazard distance (IEC 62471-5:2015)

ET-ELW21 0.97 0.97 1.13 1.13

To remove the battery

Remote Control Battery

Fig. 1 Fita Isolante

rr Remoção das baterias

Features of the Projector Quick Steps

High picture quality 1. Set up the projector.

Easy and highly flexible setup 4. Connect the power cord.

8. Adjust the image.

Precautions for use

Lens protection material

Lens hole cover

Cautions when transporting

Cautions when installing

r not set up the projector outdoors.

r not set up the projector in the following locations.

360° vertically 360° horizontally 360° tilted

Screw holes for ceiling mount

Positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and

ffDo not stack projectors on top of each other.

500 mm (19-11/16") or longer 500 mm (19-11/16") or longer

1 000 mm (39-3/8") or longer

100 mm (3-15/16") or longer

ffDo not install the projector in a confined space.

Notes regarding the wireless LAN

r not use close to other wireless devices.

ggWhen receiving a signal in a location that is angled against the screen

Application software supported by the projector

r get a good picture quality

(Operating Instructions are included.)

(For remote control unit)

Optional accessories (product name) Model No.

About your projector

1 Power <v/b> button 12 <AUTO SETUP/CANCEL> button

25 Remote control wired terminal

Caution label at the back of the remote control

1 Remote control signal receiver (front) 9 Air exhaust port

17 Luminance sensor (x page 88) 19 Top slide cover

[PICTURE] menu 85 [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu 113

[NETWORK/USB] menu 140 Maintenance/replacement 200

17 Luminance sensor (x page 88) 19 Top slide cover